lal"    ..-  .jf-u-- ~. ..a-  -c. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


z. 


1.0    Hfi^  1^ 


1^  1^    112.2 
2!   pio    12.0 

Mut. 


li  I.I 

MUt. 

Illll^ 

IL25  i U   IIIIIL6 


V] 


71 


^^' 


>^^ 


t 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)872-4503 


CIHM/ECMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


.;:>WJISW*[i 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


0 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


D 
D 
D 
D 
D 


Couverture  endommagee 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restauree  et/ou  pelliculee 

Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 

Coloured  maps/ 

Cartes  geographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  et6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-§tre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  unie 
modification  dans  la  m^thode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu^s  ci-dessous. 


D 
D 
D 


Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagees 

Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaur^es  et/ou  pellicul^es 


"TT^    Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
y^\    Pages  decolor^es.  tachet^es  ou  piqu6es 


Pages  detached/ 
Pages  detachees 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Quality  in^gale  de  I'impression 


D 


Bound  with  other  material/ 
Relie  avec  d'autres  documents 


D 


Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  supplementaire 


D 


D 


Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

Lareliure  serree  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int^rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
11  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajout^es 
lors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte. 
mais,  lorsque  cela  Stait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  et§  filmees. 


D 


D 


Only  edition  available/ 
S<3u\e  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellemenf 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  peluro, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  filmees  i  nouveau  de  fagon  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


D 


Additional  comments:/ 
Commentairas  suppl^mentaires: 


This  Item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  filmd  au  taux  de  reduction  indiqu6  ci-dessous. 


10X 

^n 

18X 

22X 

26X 

30X 

K 

12X 

16X 

20X 

2Jx 

28X 

32X 

■WiiiftMiiiiiilthag'taDMaWBMHiNW 


I 


t^ 


e 

etails 
!S  du 
nodifier 
)r  unlB 
ilmage 


es 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quaiity 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — »>  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  y  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 


L'exemplaire  film6  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
g6n6rosit6  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  6t6  reproduites  avec  ie 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetd  de  l'exemplaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimis  sont  fiimds  en  commenpant 
par  Ie  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  Ie  second 
plat,  selon  Ie  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  film^s  en  commenpant  par  la 
premidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  Ie 
cas:  Ie  symbole  — ^  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  Ie 
symbole  V  signifie  "FIN". 


Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
fiim^s  d  des  taux  de  reduction  diffdrents. 
Lorsque  Ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  dtre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich6,  il  est  film6  d  partir 
de  Tangle  sup6rieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  Ie  nombre 
d'images  n6cessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  m6thode. 


errata 
i  to 

if 

e  peluro, 

;on  h 


12 


32X 


i 


1 

2 

3 

:       t 

2 

3 

■    4 

5 

6 

\ 


^^^1  .LS5 

..■■I . 

■       .       '           1  ■.        Y         .      '  ■      ' 
..■•l\\.                                                                                      » 

. - 

^^^Amh^ 

« 

* 

Akmntm,  i  w«¥*  ^  'y***'!  •  ■  *  " '  w»^ww*i>"> 


SvJ; 


c  -j<.Vig>tyr-ii-.-^*wi«***^r.it»«t.. 


»-.if<.iietfyr-'iTi-:)'iM 


/I''     %  '.'L       .  Jul  iiij,aiiiii|iii*.j 


MA<li*^i^ik^k**AA«iAA*^^^k*A*AAi*d 


'©.S'e/Tr-  • 


8ih|ei*ic^i(^ 


Panual  flf  f  |0n0grHp|g. 


BBINO   A 


i^ 


COMPLETE  GUIDE 


TO  THE   ACQUISITION  Or 


Sifman's  Honttit  Sfeffrt|aii&. 


B7    ELIAS    LONOLET. 


CINCINNATI: 

LOXOI.EY  imOTHERS,  PIIOXETIC  ITnUSHERS, 

1681  VINE  ST.,  BETWhe:>  FC'J!::!I  AKD  tltTH. 

—  AND   FOB  SALE   BV  — 

Oti»  Clspp,  Boston;  Fowlers  &  Wells,  New  York;  Fowlers,  Wells 

ft  Co.,  Ffalladelphia;  John  T.  Shrrock,  Pittsborg;  S.  D. 

NewbTo,  Lansing,  Mich.;  E.H.  Spanlding,  St.Lonla: 

B.  Spanlding,  Dubnqne,  Iowa;   J.  B.  New. 

coinb,Elgin,  III.;  and  majr  be  ordered 

of  Booksellers  generallf . 

1857.  '* 


-^-■e^y3^^Z)^ 


I W^WWW^W9WW^ 


'*»**V^P1"****W 


,'-  I ' 


-I  ..   uniwjijun  m;:^!'!'* 


I  tf 


I 


fca^iaaaniiBi  i 


hAAdhA*A*Ai**Arf 


V^V 

V^^ 


\^ 


<i.'\ 


^■ 


Entered  occordinj;  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1853, 

BY  LONOLBY    BROTHERS. 

In   tho   Clerk's  Offk'o  of   tlio    District  Court  for  tbo 

Southern  District  I't'  Oliio. 


i  I 


^'^'^''^l^^ilMmmmmmmmmmmm 


AA*ih^  AA^AAJ^Mfc^ 


i 


<<i*A***«iA*AA^^A 


** ^,^^t,^tl^,^4 


k*^b***^i^a^Mh 


? 
,^-\ 


:*^:!  «, 


■  1353, 
)T  tbo 


f^rffntf. 


In  preparing  this  Manual  of  Plionetic  Siiortliand,  tiio 
author  has  had  one  leading  object  in  view,  namely:  to  fur- 
nish a  means  for  acquiring  speedily  a  correct  and  practical 
knowledge  of  the  much  coveted  art.  The  books  that  havo 
heretofore  been  used  have  all  answered  a  good  purpose;  but 
they  have,  with  one  exception  probably,  been  rendered  com- 
paratively obsolete  by  the  introduction  into  the  system  of  two 
or  three  importcnt  improvements.  These  arc  incorporated 
into  the  present  work,  by  which  it  is  rendered  a  re'iable  and 
pernuinent  text-book. 

In  one  important  particular  this  treatise  differs  from  all 
others  heretofore  published;  namely,  the  exercises  to  bo 
written  by  tho  pupil  are  printed  in  phonetic  spelling.*  By 
this  arrangement  three  important  advantages  are  gained: 
First:  the  learner  will  be  made  acquainted  with  the  philoso- 
phy and  utility  of  phonetic  spelling  as  applied  to  printing, 
and  will  generally  be  so  well  pleased  with  it  as  to  become  its 
ardent  advocate.  Second;  in  writing  his  exercises  the  pupil 
will  bo  enabled  to  transcribe  the  words  into  Phonography 
more  readily,  for  learners  are  very  apt  to  be  troubled  by  try- 
ing  to  get  as  many  letters  into  their  phonographic  words  as 
the  eld  spelling  contains,  and  thus  make  blunders;  and,  from 
inexperience  in  tho  analysis  i  words,  there  is  great  liabilitv 
of  inaccurate  vocalization;  b^^  hy  writing  from  tho  word's 
printed  phonetically  both  of  thes,!  difficulties  will  be  avoided. 
Third:  the  familiarity  with  Phonotypy  thus  acquired  will  also 

*An  tdilioii  is  also  printed,  in  wliieli  tho  cxorclaos  to  bTwrittTrTm^Jn 
tlio  common  spelling,  for  tlio  aecoiumodiUiou  of  sneh  perxoni  m  do  not 
wi3h  to  give  any  lUto.ition  to  phonotypy.  That  will  bo  dosi.'intod  a? 
ther,«««/u«cdi(ian:  thl.;i  as  the  M'^i- Av  "■-•,  wh;oh  will  always  be  sent. 
Ill  filling  orders,  unless  thf  other ia  sp.'cif ltd. 


^'^•^mr^^mii^v^iiww^ 


'^^^'^'^^'^^^^^'■'••^•vww^^w*^ 


^ 


.,.^-,_...ii ._ 


Lifi.  .jii'im^t 


taMMk***«*« 


IV 


IMIEFACR. 


bo  of  service  to  the  phonocrriiphic  student  herealter,  in  ena- 
bling him  to  rcail  with  ease  such  phonetic  books  and  papers 
as  Jie  may  meet  with  elsewhere. 

In  support  of  tiio  utility  of  this  feature  we  niif,'ht  give  the 
testimony  of  scores  of  phonoirrnphic  teachers  and  hundreds 
of  private  learners;  but  the  foUowinjj  from  Henry  M.  Park- 
hurst,  the  distinguished  Confcres.sional  Reporter,  will  suffice 
here:  "One  phonographer  thoroughly  imbued  with  the  spirit 
of  the  Spelling  Reform,  is  worth  more  than  a  dozen  who 
have  merely  taken  a  course  of  lessons.  Indeed,  I  rather 
think  there  is  more  hoi)e  of  a  man  who  has  never  heard  of 
Phonography,  than  if  one  who  has  learned  it  without  learn- 
ing Phonotypy." 

Another  leading  feature  is  such  an  arrangement  of  the  les- 
sons that  no  word,  or  class  of  words,  is  required  to  be  written 
until  the  principle  has  been  explained  by  whicli  they  are 
written  in  their  most  approved  forms.  By  this  means,  the 
student  is  not  compelled  to  spend  his  time  in  learning  to 
write  certain  words,  and  then  suffer  the  discouragement  of 
having  to  drop  and  forget  the  forms  thus  learned,  and  famil- 
iarize himself  with  new  and  bet.er  ones.  What  ia  once 
learned  in  this  book,  remains  a  fixed  fact  with  the  pupil  in  all 
his  after  use  of  the  system.  There  are  hundreds  of  persons, 
who,  having  studied  Phonography  through  what  was  called 
the  "  learner's  style,"  have  not  yet  been  able  to  drop  it  and 
adopt  the  advanced  and  more  practical  style  of  writing;  but 
they  will  have  to  do  it  before  they  can  be  recognized  ar  good 
phonographic  writers;  and  the  unlearning  of  their  present 
lengthy  and  awkward  forms  for  words,  added  to  the  new  forms 
they  must  learn,  is  fully  equal  to  learning  the  system  from 
the  beginning. 

In  consequence  of  this  progressive  arrangement,  the  exer- 
cises to  be  written  necessarily  possess  an  imperfect  style  of 
composition.  And  the  words  in  each  exercise  being  confined 
as  much  as  possible  to  the  illustration  oE  the  principle  just 
introduced,  renders  necessary  a  resort  to  many  circuitous  ex- 


•#, 


•■n-iit»ittiiiiiiiir«rrifirr<5ai'ii!Wir1P  "***■**■* 


jiWii^iiriMfliWIiurt'^ 


<■»«[**««*' 


alter,  in  ena- 
g  and  papura     I 

gilt  give  the  ' 
nnd  hundred:! 
nry  M.  Pork- 
',  will  suffice 
'ith  the  spirit 
a  dozen  who 
Bed,  I  rather 
iver  heard  of 
'ithout  learn- 

!nt  of  the  lc8- 
to  be  written 
lich  they  are 
lia  means,  the 
in  learning  to 
urngement  of 
id,  and  iamil- 
Vhat  is  once 
he  pupil  in  all 
Is  of  persons, 
at  was  called 
to  drop  it  and 
f  writing;  but 
rnized  a^  good 

their  present 
the  new  forms 

system  from 

ent,  the  exer- 
erfect  stylo  of 
being  confined 
principle  just 
circuitous  ex- 


! 


-  ''flijijiiiMHiitrilf i^ii|t.ii'j<Wmt<^trt 


I  I  iiiniiKi  tuiiiiiii^iifiWiiiit^'*"'"! 


k**«**^^M 


I'REFACK.  V 


prpisions  for  the  development  of  an  idea;  this  hnrHlinosH  and 
quaintnoss,  however,  diminishes  as  successive  lessons  are 
mastered. 

The  Review  nt  the  close  of  each  lesson  is  a  new  feature, 
and  will  bo  of  great  assistance  to  the  teacher,  especially  to 
the  inexperienced,  in  questioning  his  claHs  us  to  what  they 
have  gone  over;  it  wi'l  also  be  useful  to  the  privoto  learner, 
filling  the  place,  almost,  of  an  oral  instructor.  The  questions 
maybe  asked  the  class  either  collectively  or  individually;  the 
latter  is  generally  the  better  way.  It  would  be  well,  as  often 
ns  convenient,  to  have  the  pupils  illustrate  their  answers  on 
the  black-board. 

Immediately  following  the  explanation  of  each  new  prin- 
ciple is  a  Reading  Exercise,  embracing,  as  much  as  possib/o. 
words  illustrative  of  the  preceding  text.  This  is  followed  jy 
an  Exercise  for  Writing,  which  should  be  written  before  j'j- 
gressing  further,  while  the  manner  in  which  the  words  are  to 
be  formed  are  fresh  in  the  mind.  Then,  at  the  close  of  each 
lesson,  is  a  general  Writing  Exercise,  embodying,  beside  the 
principles  just  presented,  all  that  has  previously  been  learned. 
This  should  be  written  by  each  pupil,  during  the  interval  be- 
tween the  meetings  of  the  class;  nnd  at  the  next  recitation, 
the  pupils  should  exchange  their  manuscripts  with  each 
other,  and  then  read,  each  a  sentence  in  turn,  from  their 
written  exercises.  They  might  then  be  passed  to  the  teacher 
for  his  correction. 

The  author  would  acknowledge-  his  indebtedness  to  the 
PlMrwgraphic  Class-book  of  Anrrews  &.  Bovle,  the  first  text- 
book of  the  system  published  in  America,  for  many  of  his 
most  approp.  late  illustrations;  and  to  the  Plumographic  In- 
ttrucU/r,  by  James  C.  Boothe,  the  more  recent  work  generally 
used,  for  numerous  sentences,  and,  in  a  few  cases,  whole  par- 
agraphs of  exercises  for  reading  and  writing. 

For  the  expression  of  some  of  the  following  "Advantages 
of  Phonography,"  he  is  indebted  to  Prof.  Gouraud,  the  author 
of  a  work  but  little  known,  entitled  "Cosmo-Fhonography." 


^'*<^'«^^^^i>««'i^n>»'«^vww^m^>^r*'«iWiF«vwwwi*i«wwwv«< 


-^^^^.  . .  .  >. 


Sbbantagts  of  pbonograpliiT. 

PHONooRAritT  hfts  brpD  (Icfincil  n«  a  philosophicnl  niPthod 
of  writing  the  Ei.glish  ianjjunjrp,  with  iin  ulphiibot  composed 
of  the  simplest  geomctriinl  Hignx,  which  accurnti'ly  n'prespiit 
the  Bounds  of  spokon  words.  It  may  bo  writton  nix  times  as 
fast  as  the  ordinary  jonglinnd,  and  is  equally  IpRiblc.  Aside 
from  the  scientific  proprii'ty  of  the  Hystem,  as  made  manifest 
in  the  Introduction  which  follows,  the  following  practical 
advantages  are  worthy  of  consideration: 

1.  To  profosHors  of  scientific  and  literary  institutions— to 
gentlemen  of  the  bench  or  the  bar— to  legislators  in  the  halls 
ofrcpresenttttion— to  ministers  of  religion— to  lecturers  on 
the  various  arts  and  sciences— it  presents  the  most  invalu- 
oble  aid,  in  enabling  them  to  arrange,  condense,  nnd  fix  their 
thoughts,  facts,  arguments  and  j)roof8,  in  the  briefest  period 
of  time  and  the  shortest  possible  space,  presenting,  in  the 
condensed  schedule  of  a  imall  page,  a  full  and  complete  syn- 
opsis of  their  most  elaborate  speeches,  orations,  or  discourses. 

2.  By  its  aid,  the  advocates  in  the  courts  of  justice  or  the 
halls  of  trial,  will  bo  enabled  to  write,  with  ease  and  accu- 
racy, either  the  full  depositions  of  important  witnesses,  or  the 
facts,  proofs,  evidences,  and  arguments  of  legal  opponents, 
and  thus  be  in  a  position,  not  only  to  meet  them  with  readi- 
nesb  and  strength,  but  eventually  to  thoroughly  overthrow 
and  refute  them. 

3.  The  student  in  the  halls  of  science  can  transcribe  with 
faithfulness,  and  preserve  in  the  smallest  compass,  the  valu- 
able lessons  of  professors,  ond  thus  preserve,  for  the  medita- 
tion of  his  leisure  hours,  a  connected  xoMe,  instead  of  broken, 
detached,  and  uncertain  fragments,  that  often  serve  to  con- 
fuse, bewilder,  or  perplex. 

4.  Merchants,  and  clerks  of  mercantile  houses,  to  whom 
tiTM  and  space  are  really  a  desideratum,  will  find  Phonography 
a  most  invaluable  auxiliary;  as  the  ease  with  which  it  can 

1^ 


^...i^S^lir-,*-,,?'  — *-J 


laMk^«i****ik*< 


liicnl  method 
ict  composed 
L'ly  roprospiit 
Mix  times  as 
;il)lc.  Aside 
ado  manift'st 
ng    practicol 

ititutions — to 
'8  in  the  halitt 
lecturers  on 
most  invalu- 
nndfix  their 
iefest  period 
iting,  ill  the 
omplete  syn- 
or  discourses, 
justice  or  the 
se  and  accu- 
lesBCs,  or  the 
il  opponents, 
i  with  readi- 
ly overthrow 

inscribe  with 
ass,  the  valu- 
r  the  medita- 
id  of  broken, 
lerve  to  con- 

ses,  to  whom 
Phonogrophy 
which  it  can 

l»»H  H  »»»■■!■ 


k*A«iAA*Mk4^Mafli«Hki*rfhtfMh« 


ADVANIAOKB   OP   PIIONOORAPIIV. 


VU 


be  learned  and  acquired,  and  the  facility  and  roailinoHi  with 
which  it  can  be  written  and  nml,  will  enable  them  to  tran- 
scribe their  accounts,  to  nolo  their  memnranilu,  to  post  up 
their  bills,  and  oven  to  conduct  their  correspondence,  in  less 
than  onc-yf/i''*  "' the  ordinary  time,  and  in  a  coUHiderublo  re- 
ductinn  of  the  ordinary  space;  and  as  "  time  h  money"  it 
prenents  to  them  indeed  a  most  invaluable  gain. 

5.  To  the  author,  editor,  or  general  writer — to  the  orator, 
legislator,  or  minister — how  invaluublo  must  it  be,  when  ihey 
reflect  how  many  of  their  most  brilliant  thoughts  and  most 
glowing  conceptions,  how  mony  of  the  most  sparkling  gems 
of  their  imaginations  und  the  most  radiant  pearls  of  their 
thoughts,  that  in  moments  of  genius  and  enthusinnm  flush 
like  electric  sparks  from  the  mind,  aro  forever  lost  for  the 
want  of  some  Vaguerrean  process,  like  the  one  we  present, 
to  catch  and  transfix  them  on  the  wirif ,  recording  them  on 
the  glowing  page  in  all  the  freshness,  vigor,  and  brilliancy  of 
their  first  conception,  as  rapidly  as  they  aro  presented  to  the 
mind!  and  for  the  lack  of  which,  alas!  like  the  dazzling  flash 
of  the  evanescent  meteor,  they  fade  and  expire  as  ropidly  as 
they  are  kindled,  and  leave  but  tho  indistinct  memory  of  their 
trace  behind. 

0.  A  practical  acquaintance  with  this  art  is  highly  favor- 
able to  the  improvement  of  the  mind,  invigorating  all  its  fac- 
ulties, and  drawing  forth  all  its  resources.  The  close  atten- 
tion requinite  in  following  tho  voice  of  the  speaker  (in  report- 
ing) induce«  hfibits  of  patience,  persevenince  and  watchful- 
ness, which  will  gradually  extend,  till  they  form  habits  that 
will  bo  found  usolul  through  life.  The  close  attention  to  tho 
words  and  thoughts  of  the  wpfaker  which  is  necessary  in 
writing  them  down,  will  nivturally  have  a  tendency  to  endue 
the  mind  with  quickness  of  apprehension  and  distinctness  of 
perception,  whereby  the  judgment  will  be  strengthened  and 
the  taste  refined. 

7.  The  memory  is  also  improved  by  tho  practice  of  Pho- 
nography.    The  necessity   for  the  writer  to  retain  in   hia 


il 


.*-?»• 


*  i 


''''''-■'*-^*-'**-*--* 


hArih^^**4M 


vm 


ADVANTAGES  OF  PHONOaRAPHY. 


mind  the  last  sentence  of  the  speaker,  while  he  is  attending 
at  the  same  time  to  what  Tollows,  and  also  to  penning  down 
his  words,  must  be  highly  beneficial  to  that  faculty,  which  is 
more  than  any  other  improved  by  exercise.  It  draws  out 
and  improves  all  the  faculties  of  the  mind. 

"Phonography,"  says  Messrs.  Fowlers  &  Wells,  "we  re- 
gard as  one  of  the  moat  important  inventions  of  the  age,  and 
one  which  should  be  open  to  every  person  desirous  of  being 
considered  educated.  As  a  system  of  reporting,  general  cor- 
respondence, and  memoranda,  it  is  unparalleled  in  usefulness. 
In  chirography,  it  is  what  the  telegraphs  are  in  agencies  for 
transmitting  thought  We  employ  three  reporters,  one  in 
our  office  and  two  who  travel  with  lecturers  from  our  house. 
In  ten  minutes  we  can  dictate  an  article  for  publication  which 
we  could  not  compose  and  write  in  two  hours;  besides  it  con- 
tains more  spirit  and  freshness  than  if  labored  through  at  the 
slow  pace  of  ordinary  composition.  Every  scholar  should  by 
all  means  learn  it." 

Professor  Hart,  Principal  of  the  Philadelphia  High  School, 
says:  "  Phonography  has  been  introduced  into  this  institu- 
tion two  years  and  a  half,  and  has  been  learned  by  about 
four  hundred.  Two  hundred  are  studying  it  now.  It  is  one 
of  the  regular  branches  of  the  course,  being  attended  to  three 
times  a  week  during  the  whole  of  the  first  year.  Had  I  not 
supposed  it  to  be  of  much  practical  value,  I  should  not  have 
urged  its  introduction,  a  measure  which  I  have  seen  no  occa- 
sion to  regret.  Such  of  our  students  as  have  made  Phono- 
graphic Reporting  a  profession,  have  got  along  in  life  faster, 
by  all  odds,  than  those  in  any  other  kind  of  business,  and 
that  without  the  possession  of  any  special  brilliancy  of  tal- 
ents. Some  of  them,  not  yet  turned  twenty,  are  now  mak- 
ing more  money  by  Phonographic  Reporting  than  the  Princi- 
pal of  the  High  School,  after  having  given  himself  for  more 
than  twenty  years  to  his  profession." 

Said  the  Hon,  Thomas  Benton:  "  Had  this  art  been  known 
forty  years  ago,  it  would  have  saved  me  twenty  years  of 
hard  labor." 

"  It  is  my  humble  opinion  that  it  will  eventually  supersede 
the  present  svstem  of  writing,  as  the  steam  carriage  train 
supersedes  the  old  eight  inch  wheeled  wagon." — Eev,  Dunbar. 

Such  are  the  tendencies  of  the  art  this  book  is  designed  to 
unfold. 


yy^i^y^y p^^iy^^iWWI^y^^^^W^^^^^^ip^^^^t^'y^ 


i^- 


O  •~.-.~9ni^-^.  •:  -  »*_»  VK^  flfC'i 


^MiM>.,iailWfcfec^jU»(J..llC«lK»<»»a»»»»*l«»*» 


is  attending 
nning  down 
Ity,  whicii  is 
[t  draws  out 


uiWiw 


ii  :'i|iiii  i.B!i))nt'iii.ii)!i»nii 


;lL8,  "we  re- 
the  age,  and 
us  of  being 
general  cor- 
1  usefulnesa. 
agencies  for 
ters,  one  in 
fi  our  house, 
lation  which 
sides  it  con- 
rough  at  the 
ir  should  by 

ligh  School, 
this  institu- 
jd  by  about 
r.  It  is  one 
ided  to  three 
Had  I  not 
lid  not  have 
len  no  occa- 
ade  Phono- 
1  life  faster, 
jsiness,  and 
uncy  of  tal- 
i  now  mak- 
1  the  Princi- 
!lf  for  more 

seen  known 
ty  years  of 

ly  supersede 
irriage  train 
Rev.  Dunbar. 
designed  to 


^^f^m^^^^w^m 


*AAikA*AA**ikAAAAAAAA<bAAAAtf^ 


>««'iii« ^^^^^ 


Sntrobuftion. 


progress  of  Improbrattnl.  —  Within  the  last  hundred 
years  important  changes  have  taken  place  in  almost  every 
department  of  industry.  The  mechanic  no  longer  seeks  the 
swiftly  running  stream  to  propel  his  machinery,  but  erects 
his  mill  or  factory  on  ground  the  most  convenient  for  labor 
or  for  market,  and  brings  the  elements  into  subjection  for  the 
performance  of  Tiis  drudgery;  the  stage-coach  horse-power, 
for  locomotion,  is  almost  forgotten  in  consideration  of  the 
iron-boned  steed  hitched  to  the  enormous  wheeled-pniace  ; 
the  sea-voyage  of  weary  months  is  now  performed  pleasantly 
in  as  many  weeks,  by  the  application  of  steam  to  navigation; 
and  the  man  of  business  no  longer  waits  the  rapid  trans- 
mission of  thought  by  such  conveyance,  but  con^municates 
through  the  length  and  breadth  of  our  wide-spreading  coun- 
try with  lightning  speed. 

Thus  the  genius  of  invention  and  improvement  has  been 
abroad  in  the  land,  and  although  for  a  long  time  she  confined 
her  skill  to  building  steamboats  and  making  railroads,  con- 
structing machinery  and  teaching  the  lightning  how  to  talk, 
she  has  not  altogether  forgotten  the  world  of  intellect;  and 
Phonography,  her  last,  most  promising  and  beneficent  boon, 
presents  to  the  world  an  alphabet  of  letters  so  simple  and 
facile  that  he  who  uses  it  may  readily  keep  pace  with  the 
fastest  speaker, — aflTarding  a  system  of  writing  as  much  supe- 
rior to  that  of  the  old  scrint  alphabet,  as  railroads  are  to  the 
ancient  truck-wheeled  wagon,  or  the  electric  telegraph  to  the 
post  boy's  plodding  gait. 


rf»VJaa»il»«««»*l*'-<M*<*»»- 


""""" ' VTiTTT ^^ 

(9) 


^maimi\V^j'tK'*<!\Viiftiif:i^  f'JiiWM.t^l^Mlly- 


I  "-■^"  -"""-' 


M 


10 


IMIIMIU  I Tlo.N    TO    TlIK 


"Our  liviiiij  fliickH  of  tlioufrlils  iiimmI  no  ImiiriT  lrii(l|ro  it 
8lo\vly  mill  wt'nrily  dnwii  llic  |ii'n  mid  iilniiir  tin-  piipiT,  tiiri- 
ilprinjj  I'licli  otlipr  bb  tlipy  Htriijrjflp  throu^jli  the  Hlriiit.  gato  of 
tho  old-linml  \vritin(j;  our  tn«i|irt  ol'  I't'cliTi^rH  need  rid  inoro 
crawl,  lis  HMiiilH  crnwl.tn  tlicir  sliilioii  on  tin*  |m;^(';  ri';;iiin'r.t. 
nrtor  ri'fjimcMit  may  now  trot  liri^ikly  forward,  to  (ill  pnriijrrnpli 
nitor  pnrnjrraph:  and  writinjr,  oiico  a  troiililc,  is  now  at  lircatli- 
in^-onHC.  Our  kind  and  lovinjr  thoughts,  warm  mid  traiiH- 
pariMit.  lifinid  as  nii'ltcd  from  the  hot  heart,  wliall  no  ioiij^cr 
frrow  opaquo,  and  froezo  with  a  todious  dribhlin^  from  thi; 
pen;  but  the  whole  soul  may  now  pour  itself  forth  in  a  sweet 
shower  of  words.  I'honotypy  and  Phoiiofrraphy  will  be  of  a 
UBO  in  the  world  not  dreamt  of,  but  by  a  few." — The  Evangd 
of  Li>w,\>.  '2.'U,by  Henrv  SurroN. 

We  do  not  wish  to  underrate  the  value  of  Uio  present  sys- 
tem of  writing;  it  has  been  of  great  service  in  its  time,  hav- 
ing (lone  much  in  the  way  of  civili/.ing  and  enlightening  the 
races  of  men.  But  the  state  of  things  in  the  scientilic 
world  demanded  a  change  in  the  character  of  our  written 
language.  Science  is  a  stern  ruler;  her  laws  encircle  every 
art,  and  although  for  a  long  time  they  may  remain  undiscov- 
ered or  not  applied,  yet  as  the  world  progresses  in  knowledge 
and  learns  wisdom  from  experience,  it  will  cause  them  to  bo 
developed,  and  future  generations  will  derive  the  advantages 
of  eonforiiiing  to  them.  These  facts  have  been  illustrated  in 
the  various  improvements  to  which  we  have  alluded;  and 
they  are  still  to  bo  expected  in  such  departments  as  have  not 
yet  undergone  the  remodeling  process  of  modern,  ingenuity. 
They  take  their  turn  in  the  great  circle  of  progression;  and 
it  is  the  object  of  the  present  work  to  demonstrate  the  laws 
that  apply  to  the  art  of  writing,  as  required  at  this  stage  of 
the  world's  history. 

The  spirit  of  our  age  demands  two  new  features  in  the  art 
of  writing  :  First,  Speed  in  Us  execution;  second,  System  in  its 
ortluigraphy.     In  treating  of  the  first  desideratum   we  shall 


Hxw^^^rv^ 


»V*»W*W*»»W»*W»"WV^^»WW^W»^i*»»»»*»»»»^ 


nStMfj  iiii.ijain.WNHi  1 1  i««*(g.ii'.-.j»CTLa«iiMi>*i««i'>L'»i't»^*»iiiiji'i'*'''i'i<il*B»>>ii'tiiia> 


.n^H.iewi'iwiffla'.iatf--; 


IT  lriulfft>  it 
|iii|ii'r,  tiin- 
rnit  gato  of 
^il  11(1  inoro 
(■;  ri'^^iiiK-rit 
1  piiriijrrnpli 
V  lit  lirt'iitli- 
1111(1  triiiiH- 
I  no  longer 
g  from  tln! 
i  in  a  Bwout 
will  be  of  a 
Tlie  Evangd 

iresent  sys- 
9  time,  Iinv- 
lituning  Ihu 
e  scientific 
our  written 
icircio  every 
in  undincov- 
1  knowledge 
tiiem  to  bo 
advantages 
ilustrated  in 
illuded;  and 
OS  have  not 
I.  ingenuity, 
ession;  and 
,e  tfee  laws 
Ills  stage  of 

>8  in  the  art 
System  in  ita 
1   we  shall 


:  -.niMlimft  (|>l<jirBi.ij  — -' 


fti^r 'laft^ii 


MA.NI  ,\r,    ilV    HUONOdRAI'IIV. 


il 


brii'lly  r'-fiT  tn    fin'    niphabet,  now  in  iiSP,  nnd   thn    habits  of 
writiiiff  il  ri'f|iiirc». 

(^hr  #^lt>  CMphiibfl  ;iui>  OVtIinrir-.tpbn. — I.ilto  thf^  nnripnt 
irnpii'/ii^nts  of  indiHtry  riml  rn  nlcs  of  labor,  iIk?  alphnhnt 
of  oiir  l.ilbnr'*,  was  coiistriictoil  nt  a  time  when  the,  ingf:- 
niiify  of  iiinii  linil  not  been  brou»til  into  full  play.  The 
h'ttcrs  nrp  ronipli-x,  and  the  use  of  tliprn  fiimbnrsome  in  tlio 
pxtroin".  To  illnstratp:  Ink"  thn  letter  ^  for  exnmpb';  to 
niak(<  this  l<tter,  the  fingers  have  to  perform  four  inflections 
or  movprnciits,  while  it  represents  but  a  simple  sound;  in 
making  the  letter  ;/i.  seven  inlhjt.tiona  are  rcrjuired,  while  it, 
too,  represents  but  one  sound;  and  every  letter  of  the  old  al- 
phabet is  thus  complex,  to  a  greater  or  less  derrree,  although 
they  are  designed  each  to  represent  but  a  single  sound. 

Now,  wliile  there  is  this  complexity  in  the  art  of  writincr, 
in  spoken  language  the  organs  of  speech  perform  but  one 
movement  in  the  enunciation  of  each  letter;  and  hence  the 
labor  of  the  jienman  is  four  or  five  times  aa  great  as  that  of 
the  speaker;  while  the  latter  is  moving  ofT  freely,  as  on  the 
wings  of  the  wind,  the  former  is  trudging  at  tho  snaiPs  pace, 
weary  and  provoked  at  the  contrast. 

The  object  to  be  accomplished,  therefore,  is  to  present  an 
alphabet  each  letter  of  which  can  be  writte..  by  one  inflec- 
tion of  the  pen,  so  that  the  writer  need  no  longer  be  four 
times  diutancud  by  the  moderate  speaker;  and  if  the  reader 
will  follow  us  through  this  book,  he  will  see  that  the  system 
we  are  about  to  develop  more  than  meets  this  requisition. 

But  a  greater  difficulty,  if  possible,  than  the  mere  substitu 
tion  of  a  new  alphabet,  is  to  be  overcome.  The  orthography 
employed  in  using  the  old  alphabet  is  nearly  as  cumbrous  aa 
the  formation  of  its  letters;  while  It-t  want  of  system  makes 
it  a  study  of  many  years  to  memorize  the  spelling  of  the  fifty 
or  eighty  thousand  words  in  our  language. 

Thus,  take  the  sound  of  a;  if  we  had  nothing  to  do,  in  order 
to  represent  it  incur  common  writing,  but  to  write  the  one 
letter  called  a,  the  evil  would  be  trifling  compared  with  what 


F*»»*WWW»»»V<IWi^>^ 


iu«ijiiju«»ii»»*«Mitni>iig.»- 


J 


I 


. 


II '  '  'MM 


I - LLLLIZI^:^ 


12 


INTKODIICTION    TO    THE 


1 


it  is.  But  we  more  frequently  have  to  write  two  or  throe,  or 
even  four  letters  to  represent  this  one  sound.  It  has,  in  fact, 
thirty-four  different  modes  of  representation,  consisting  of 
various  combinations  of  nine  difl'eront  letters,  a  few  only  of 
which  we  have  room  to  exhibit.  Thus,  mi,  ns  in  Aavou;  ai, 
as  in  pojn;  aigtua  in  campaign;  nigh,  us  in  straight;  eight; 
as  in  weighed,  &c.  Now  common  sense,  a^  well  us  t,li.>  laws 
of  science,  suggests  that  the  sound  of  «  in  euch  and  all  these 
should  be  written  with  the  same  letter.  When  this  shall 
be  done,  more  than  ttoo  thirds  of  the  labor  of  representing 
this  sound  will  be  saved;  but  by  substitulinir  a  new  letter  that 
can  be  made  with  one  movement  of  the  pen  instead  of  the 
four  that  a  requires,  and  of  the  four  times  four  that  several  of 
the  above  combinations  require,  m'ne-<e/i^/w  of  this  labor  will 
be  avoided.  In  writing  the  sound  a  in  these  five  words,  in- 
stead of  making  fifty  inflections  of  the  pen,  we  will  have  to 
make  hnl  five  I 

The  sound  of  e  is  represented  in  fortg  diflferent  ways.  Ex- 
amples: M,  as  in  each;  ea-ue  as  in  league;  eye,  as  in  keyeA; 
eig,  as  in  sei^nor;  eigh,  as  in  l.eigh.  We  need  not  repeat  that 
the  sound  of  e  in  each  of  these  words  should  be  repre- 
sented by  the  same  letter;  or  that  by  substituting  for  the 
complex  letter  e  a  simple  character  that  can  be  made  with 
one  motion  of  the  pen,  seven-eights  or  nine-tenths  of  the  la- 
bor in  writing  would  be  saved.  These  are  facts  that  are  evi- 
dent,  after  the  illustrations  are  presented.  And  we  might 
thus  illustrate  the  unscientific  mode  of  representing  nearly 
every  word  in  our  language,  with  equally  formidable  results. 
But  we  will  only  state  the  melancholy  fact,  that  the  various 
sounds  employed  in  speaking  tne  English  language  are  each 
represented  in  from  four  to  forty  ways,  and  that  in  the  large 
majority  of  cases  two  or  more  letters  are  required  to  do  the 
service.  It  is  also  true,  that  there  is  no  letter  in  the  alpha- 
bet that  uniformly  represents  the  same  sound;  thus,  a  has  a 
different  sound  in  each  of  the  following  words  :  ate,  ot,  all, 
are,  any. 


pw»*w"»^»^»»***^'"' 


.j_.,Ji«..,«,*.»«***,««».^^ 


mm> 


"IgiAiJl'luiiij'Uji' 


*tmtf9 


■<fc^'fc^^>^i^^**^iA^i^^i^<i*lAAA^A^hAA^AAA<^^h^^^^^^<|rfK^^^^^^^^^^^Mfc^^ 


?r  throe,  or 
has,  in  fuet, 
msistiiig  (if 
ew  only  (if 
Aaeon;  al, 
itiifht;  eiijhe, 
us  t,li">  )aw8 
nd  iill  these 
1  thia  shall 
representing 
IV  letter  thut 
steud  of  the 
at  several  of 
lis  labor  will 
e  words,  in- 
(vili  have  to 

,  ways.  Ex- 
aa  in  keyed; 
t  repeat  that 
Id  bo  repre- 
iting  for  the 
a  made  with 
hs  of  the  lap 
that  are  evi- 
id  we  might 
nting  nearly 
able  results, 
the  various 
age  are  each 
in  the  large 
»d  to  do  the 
n  the  alpha* 
thus,  a  has  a 
:  ate,  at,  ell, 


MANUAL   OK    I'HONOUKAPllV. 


13 


jl_ 


The  consequence  of  this  want  of  system  is,  in  the  lan- 
guage of  a  distinguished  writer  on  the  subject  of  education, 
that  "  reading  is  the  most  difficult  of  human  attainments," 
And,  as  a  further  consequence,  one  third  of  the  population  of 
England  are  unable  to  read,  and  one  half  unable  to  write; 
while  in  the  United  States,  the  number  of  adult  white  per- 
sons who  can  neither  read  nor  write,  is  one  to  every  twenty 
who  can;  and  this  wide-spread  ignorance  must  continue  until 
the  rudiments  of  education  are  simplified.  Such  inconsisten- 
cies and  mischievous  errors  us  we  have  referred  to,  are  not 
in  harmony  with  the  developments  of  order  and  science  in 
most  other  branches  of  industry  and  art,  and  hence  they 
must  be  superseded  by  something  truer  and  more  expedi- 
tious; or,  if  not  superseded,  we  must  use  the  more  speedy  and 
economical  system  in  connection  with  the  old,  as  steamboats, 
railroads  and  telegraphs  are  used  conjointly  with  the  old 
modes  of  conveyance. 

Sl^e  IJljoiutit  llriunplf.  —  The  term  PJionetie  is  derived 
from  the  Greek  word  ^uvrj  speech.  A  phonetic  alphabet, 
therefore,  is  one  which,  referring  solely  to  speech,  derives  all 
its  laws  from  a  consideration  of  the  elements  of  speech.  To 
illustrate  what  we  mean  by  the  phrase  "elements  of  speech," 
we  have  but  to  ask  the  reader  to  adjust  his  lips  to  a  round 
position  and  deliver  the  voice  as  he  would  commence  to 
speak  the  words  ode,oafc,  oioit.  Now  this  same  sound  is  heard 
in  thousands  of  words  in  our  language,  and  is  what  we  call 
an  element  of  speech.  Another  element  is  heard  in  the 
commencement  of  the  word  ooee  and  at  the  termination  of 
the  word  who.  In  pronouncing  the  words  see,  say,  saw,  so,  we 
hear,  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  them,  the  same  kind  of  a 
sound,  namely  a  Aim,  which  is  also  an  element  of  speech,  for 
it  frequently  combines  with  other  sounds  to  make  words. 
By  analyzing  all  the  words  in  the  English  language,  it  has 
been  found  that  it  is  constituted  of  but  forty-three  elemen- 
tary  sounds;  or,   to    be    more    precise,  thirty-nine    simple 


»» »» »>» ,,,yi^  ' 


!»ea^iiia«>>ift«ttisiait»*ii» 


tJa^fc^AiAA^oAAAAAA  ii>*ai<fc^a  ^  AAAA^Ai 


^h^AAAArfiAiAAAAiriM 


t 
I 
I 


14 


INTRODUCTION    TO    TUK 


I 


Bounds,  and  four  compound  ones,  formed  by  the  close  union 
of  certain  simple  sounds,  which  it  is  convenient  to  consider 
as  elements.  In  speakinjr,  therefore,  our  words  consist 
simply  in  the  utterance  of  one  of  these,  or  a  combination  of 
two  or  more  of  them;  and  in  writing  these  words,  common 
sense  would  suggest  that  each  element  should  be  represented 
by  a  single  letter,  that  should  never  stand  for  any  other 
sound. 

It  is  supposed  the  original  Phoenician  alphabet,  from  which 
our  present  alphabet  is  remotely  derived,  was  phonetic;  that 
is,  it  represented  the  elements  of  speech  in  such  a  manner 
that  when  the  sounds  of  a  word  were  heard  the  writer  knew 
immediately  what  letters  to  use,  and  when  he  saw  the  letters 
he  knew  at  once  what  sounds  he  Wus  to  utter.  But  when 
this  alphabet  was  adopted  by  the  Greeks  and  Romans,  who 
used  sounds  unknown  to  tlie  I'licoiiicians,  many  of  the  old 
letters  were  necessarily  used  to  represent  new  sounds  as  well 
as  old  ones,  60  that  there  was  no  longer  any  very  strict  ac- 
cordance between  tiic  sounds  and  letters  of  words.  But 
when  other  European  nations,  including  the  English,  adopted 
the  romanic  alphabet,  and  used  it  in  very  different  ways,  inso- 
much that  no  one  could  guess  what  soundshouldbe  attributed 
to  any  one  letter,  almost  all  trace  of  the  phonetic  nature  of 
the  alphabet  was  losl.  And  hence  the  deplorable  state  of 
English  spelling  and  writiiirr,  as  depicted  in  previous  pages, 
which,  in  few  words,  is  so  bad  that  no  one  can  tell  the 
sound  of  an  unknown  word  from  its  spelling,  or  the  spelling 
of  a  new  word  from  its  sound. 

Phonetic  spelling,  therefore,  is  no  new  thing,  and  the 
efforts  of  writing  and  spelling  reformers  is  simply  an  attempt 
to  place  the  representation  of  the  English  language  on  the 
same  rational  basis  that  the  most  classic  of  the  ancient  lan- 
guages stood,  and  in  addition  thereto  to  aflbrd  the  means  of 
the  most  rapid  writing  that  it  is  possible  to  attain.  No  fur- 
ther argument,  therefore,  should  be  required,  in  presenting  a 
system  so  accordant  with  truth  and  utility. 


I 


w«w«*«i*«<N*».«««.*^^ 


i%iiiJiiii«»i<iiiniiiii|[iTi 


kAAr&AAA*^ 


close  union 
t  to  consider 
ords  consist 
mbinatlon  of 
rds,  common 
!  represented 
>r  any  otlier 

,  from  wiiich 
lonctic;  that 
:h  H  manner 
writer  knew 
w  tlie  letters 
But  when 
lomans,  who 
ly  of  the  old 
ounds  as  well 
cry  strict  uc- 
words.  But 
Tlish,  adopted 
It  ways,  inso- 
Ibe  attributed 
tic  nature  of 
■able  state  of 
■evious  pages, 
can  tell  the 
•  the  spelling 

ing,  and  the 
ly  an  attempt 
^uage  on  the 
ancient  lan- 
the  means  of 
ain.  No  fur- 
1  presenting  a 


MANUAL   OF   1'1I0N0(J11APUY, 


J5 


^^onotjrpi). — The  word  Phonotypy,  from  the  Greek  ipuvt;, 
speech,  and  rvrtof,  type,  signifies  the  printing  of  language  by 
types  which  represent  the  sounos  heard  in  speaking;  while 
Phonography,  also  from  ^uvtj  and  another  Greek  word, 
yfuftjv,  to  write,  signifies  to  write  by  sound,  oi  with  charac- 
ters thftt  represent  the  sounds  heard  in  speech.  Although  the 
latter  is  the  art  which  this  work  is  specially  designed  to  ex. 
plain,  yet  a  knowledge  of  the  former  will  materially  aid  in  its 
acquisition;  and  as  a  sufficient  acquaintance  with  it  may  bo 
obtained  in  a  few  minutes'  study,  wc  shall  here  present  a 
brief  exposition  of  it. 

The  forty-three  elementary  and  dipthongal  sounds  that  it 
has  been  found  necessary  to  represent  in  a  true  orthography 
of  the  English  language,  are  exhibited  by  the  italic  letters  in 
the  following  words  : — 

eel 


earth         ole         air 
til  ell  am 

ice,         oil,         ow\, 
pole,     Jowl,      toe,      doe, 
/ear,      veer,      th\gh,    thy, 
rare,      lull;      mum,      nun. 


all 

oak        ooze; 

on 

wp        wood; 

yea. 

way,      Aay ; 

jeer. 

came,      g&n'.c; 

zeal, 

shpU,      vision. 

arm 
ask 
mute; 
cheer, 
seal, 
Bimj. 

Of  course  the  old  twenty-six  letter  alphabet  was  incompe- 
tent to  give  a  character  for  each  of  these  forty-three  sounds. 
And  in  determining  upon  the  introduction  of  new  letters,  two 
important  considerations  presented  themselves  to  the  mind, 
both  grounded  on  the  fact  that  the  romanic  style  of  spelling 
already  existed  in  printed  books,  and  flourishes  wherever  our 
language  is  spoken  or  read.  First,  that  those  who  can  al- 
ready read  romanic  spelling  should  have  very  little  difficulty 
in  acquiring  phonetic  spelling;  and  secondly,  that  those  who 
are  taught  to  read  phonetically  should  find  that  the  greater 
part  of  the  difficulties  attendant  on  the  acquirement  of  ro- 
manic reading  were  then  overcome. 

In  order  to  accomplish  these  two  very  important  objects,  it 
was  necessary  to  use  as  many  of  the  old  romanic  letters  as 


w^ 


"'*"' » H»»»t>n»i 


n\ 


ui 


.\i 


I 

[ 


; 


I      16  INTRODUCTION   TO   TIIK 


possible,  in  the  uenBCs  which  they  most  frequently  have  in 
the  romanic  Hpelling  of  English;  and  to  make  the  new  pho- 
netic  letters  suggest  the  letters  or  combinationB  of  letters 
which  are  most  frequently  employed  to  express  their  sounds 

romanically. 

The  grand  object  was  to  make  English  reading  easy— not 
merely  in  phonetic  but  also  in  romanic  spelling,  in  order  that 
the  large  number  of  books  already  printed  should  be  still  use- 
ful,  or  rather  should  be  made  useful  to  those  to  whom  they  are 
at  present  useless-tho  book-blind,  those  who  cannot  read. 
37*/*  has  been  effected.  Not  only  is  phonetic  reading  so  easy  to 
those  who  read  romanically  that  few  find  any  difficulty  in 
the  matter  at  all,  but  those  who  have  only  learned  to  read 
phonetically  occupy  the  same  position  in  regard  to  romanic 

reading.  , 

Out  of  the  twenty-six  romanic  letters,  three,  c,  q,  x,  Have 

been  rejected.     The  fifteen  consonants, 

bdfhjlmnprtvwyz 
are  used  in  their  usual  romanic  sense;  that  is,  in  the  sense 
which  the  Enj;lish   romanic    reader  would  naturally  expect 
them  to  have  in  ai.y  new  word,  as  they  are  pronounced  at  the 
beginning  of  the  romanic  words, 

rfetJ,      /it,      /tead,       ^est,       M\,      man,        nun. 


bed. 


zeal, 


^eop,        rare,     toe,       vote,       woe,      yes, 

The  five  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  and  the  remaining  three  con- 

sonants  k,  g,  s,  are  to  be  pronounced  as  at  the  beginning  of 
am.     egg,     i",     o".      «P.     ^'^e,     get,     «up. 
New  letters  have  been  invented  for  the  sounds  expressed 

by  the  italic  letters  in  the  under-written  words  in  the  follow- 

ing  tttbli?: 

8e    Ee    aa    Aa    H<i    ^« 

ee\   MTth   «ge      a'V     "rm       ask 
mi'le 


^M^MkAAAAA^AA 


uently  have  in 

the  new  pho- 

tiona  of  letters 

as  their  aounds 

iding  easy — not 
\g,  in  order  that 
luld  be  still  use- 
whom  they  are 
iio  cannot  read, 
iding  so  easy  to 
iny  difficulty  in 
learned  to  read 
gard  to  romanic 

ree,  c,  q,  x,  have 


is,  in  the  sunse 
naturally  expect 
ronounced  at  tlio 


man,        nun, 
^es,        zeal, 

lining  three  con- 
:he  beginning  of 
^et,     «up. 
lounds  expressed 
ds  in  the  foUow- 


W^' 


IM   I  I  I  «><»< 


" 


liAAAA'kAakA*^***' 


jl 


i 


18 


INTHOUCtTKlN   TO   XlIK 


Un  tho  precedinir  pa-.-  the  whole  alphabet  in  prOHontcd, 
HyHtr.n..tlc«lly  urrttn^re.l;  lir.t,  th.  Ion-  vowel.s;  Hecon.l,  tho 
Hhort  vowels;  Ihinl.lhe  coiupoun.l  vowel-;  fourth,  tho  liqu.dH; 
fifth,  tho  con.ionanlH.     lu  this  re.pect,  unimportant  thouRh 
it  may  Hooin,  the  new  alphabet  is  an  iuiprovement  on  tho    old 
—which  is  little  more  than  a  strinjj  of  confusion— hero  a 
vowel  und  there  a  vowel. a  consonant  hero  and  another  there. 
In  addition  to  the  printin-  letters  of  the  phonetic  alphabet, 
the  lonc'Uand   script  characters  are  presented.     It  will  bo  ob- 
served.lhat  the  old  letters  are   retained  in  their  usual  sense, 
and  new  ones   introduced,  bavin-  resemblance  to  their  cor- 
resnondin.s?  printed  letter.,  and  of  as  easy  formation  as  possi- 
ble      This  alphabet  is  used  by  all  practical  tipellin-  Relorm- 
ers.  where  the  phonetic  «horthiind  could  not  be  read  by  the 
person  for  whom  the  writin-  is  done;  for  phonetic  lon-han. 
may  be  read,  with  very   little  hesitation,  by  all  who  can  rea.l 
tho  old  manuscript.     And  the  writer,  in  addition  to  the  satis- 
faction of   employing    a  scientific  orthography,  economizes 
twelve  per  cent  of  his  paper  and  time,  by  dispensing  with 
double  letters,  etc. 

^bonoqrapbn.— Phonography  being  intended  for  the  pen 
alone,  and  the  principal  object  being  rapidity  of  execution, 
with  a  reliable  degree  of  legibility,  considerable  license  is 
taken  as  regards  strictly  phonetic  principles.  It  cannot  be 
said  of  phonetic  shorthand  that  "no  sound  must  be  represent- 
ed  by  more  than  one  sign,"  and  that  "no  sign  must  represent 
more  than  one  sound."  The  reverse  of  this  statement  is  true 
in  frequent  instances;  but  not  in  such  a  way  as  materially  to 
impair  the  scientific  accuracy  of  the  system.  In  point  of 
utility  there  are  great  advantages  derived  from  huving  two  or 
three  forms  to  represent  certain  sounds,  and  nr,  serious  d.a- 

advantage.  ^    •     r     tu 

The  si-nplest  signs  which  it  was  possible  to  obtain  for  the 
phono..raphic  alphabet,  are,  1st,  the  dot;  2d,  the  da<,h;  3d,  tho 
atraiglU  line;  4th,  the  curve.    The  doU  and  dashea  are  used  to 


m»  I  I  I  y^^^'^wwr^n 


IL 


¥ 


a^.jsmmmt'-tmmitiM'i^fi'ii^i'^^*'^^^^'' 


is  prouenteil, 
;  socoikI,  tho 
li,  the  liquidit; 
jrtnnt  though 
It  oil  the    old 
xion — horo  a 
mother  there, 
letic  nlphttbet, 
It  will  bo  ob- 
r  uiiual  sense, 
to  their  cor- 
itioii  B*  poHsi- 
llini(  Relorni- 
!  reail  by  tho 
irtic  loni^hand 
who  Clin  rciiil 
III  to  the  8!itii(- 
y,  ecoiioiiiizi's 
spensing  with 

1  for  tho  pen 
of  exocution, 
ble  license  is 
It  cannot  bo 
t  be  represent- 
iiust  represent 
iteinent  is  true 
s  iniiterially  to 
I.  In  i)oint  of 
hnving  two  or 
nr.  serious  dia- 

I  obtain  for  the 
he  dash;  3d,  tho 
es  are  used  to 




.MANIIAI<   <»»•   I'llONOdliAPIIY. 


represent  tii.-  vowel.-*:  the  straight  lines  aii.l  curves  represent 
the  consommtH.  The  lollowinjr  ,|i,i^r.inis  exhibit  the  soureo 
from  which  the  latter  are  derived,  and  show  the  dilleront  posi- 
tions  they  occupy  in  representing  diflbrent  loiters. 


|L 


v_ 


^ 


(    ) 


It  will  be  observed  that  the  straifrht  lino  nssuines  four  dif- 
ferent  positions,  and  the  curved  one  eijrht;  these  are  as  many 
positions  (IS  can  be  recos^nized  without  danger  of  confusion; 
and  these  two  simple  characters  can  be  written  in  these 
twelve  positions  so  as  to  bo  just  as  distinct  and  legible  as 
though  this  number  of  diUerently  shaped  letters  were  em- 
phiyed.  Here,  now,  we  have  tho  means  of  representing 
twelve  consonant  sounds;  but  since  in  writing  we  can  make 
cither  light  or  heavy  marks,  this  number  may  bo  doubled  by 
recognizing  tho  same  number  of  heavy  straight  lines  uud 
curves. 

While  it  is  found  necessary  to  make  each  of  the  primitive 
characters  heavy,  in  order  to  obtain  a  sutlicient  number,  it  is 
also  found  a  useful  and  philosophical  method  of  distinguish- 
ing between  tho  natures  of  diflerent  sounds.  Thus,  eight  of 
the  sounds  which  these  characters  are  to  represent  are  mere 
wlihj,f,:i,  produced  by  the  transition  of  the  organs  of  speech, 
from  one  position  to  another,  or  by  the  simple  contact  of  dif-' 
ferent  parts  of  the  month,  without  any  vocal  sound ;  and 
there  are  eight  others  made  in  tho  same  manner,  but  they 
have  in  addition  a  slightly  naighened  or  vocal  sound,  which 
require  a  greater  eflbrt  to  produce  (hem. 

To  follow  nature,  therefore,  and  preserve  a  correspondence 
between  signs  and  sounds,  the  light  signs  are  made  to  repre- 
sent  the  light  or  whispered  sounds,  and  the  heavy  signs  to  re- 
present  the  heavy  sounds.  Thus,  both  the  difference  between 
the  sounds  and  their  resemblance  are  at  onc'    represented. 

^^"""^^ ^^r^rHli^ ^J 


wwmn**w^^vwrwwwww^ 


M^W^kk**MM 


liO 


INTRODICTION    TO   TtlU 


Ami  it  boinff  no  natural  to  rcprMont  a  light  •oiinil  by  a  liwht 
Btroke,  and  a  heavy  houiuI  by  a  heasy  Btroko,  the  phono- 
praphi'c  pupil  find-,  altor  a  little  practico,  that  hn  muko*  the 
difference  in  the  stroken  without  any  thought  about  it  Hut 
the  dimilarity  of  nound  betwetMi  the  heavy  and  litfht  Htrokos 
ii  80  great  that,  if  at  any  time  the  difference  in  the  thickncHH 
of  the  linen  Ih  not  clearly  made,  it  w^' I  ""t  criously  affect 
the  legibility  of  the  writing  to  thi  t;-.  ric  -ed  phoiiogra- 
phcr.  ThuH,  for  cxomple.  if  t!^  word  <^in.  -  were  written 
80  as  to  be  pronounced  Zi^uwH,  tlm  roado.  could  hardly 
mistake  the  intention  of  the  wruer. 

The  Consonanth  Bn  ilnoifled  as  follow*: — 
1.  ABRurrx— Theai  elenientn,  Homistimea  called  explo- 
dents,  are  produce.l  by  a  total  contact  of  the  orgauH  of 
Hpeech,  u  ruptly  interrupting  and  exploding  the  outward 
passage  ol  the  breath,  or  the  voice.  They  are  eight  in 
number,  and  being  stiff,  unyielding  soundn,  arc  appropriately 
represented  by  the  i  ipht  straight,  unyielding  right  lines,  as 
illustrated  in  the  following  table,— the  italiazed  letters  ol 
the  words  indicating  the  sounds  represented  : 

\  rope,  1  fa<e,      /  etch,  loci-. 


\  roic, 


1  fa<e, 
I   fa//e, 


/  edge. 


loj. 


Wh>spere<l, 

Spoken, 

By  a  little  observation  in  comparing  the  sound  of  p  with 
that  of  h,  in  the  words  rope  and  robe,  the  distinction  ok'  whis- 
pered and  spoken,  or  light  and  heavy,  will  be  appreciated.  As 
far  as  articulation,  or  the  contact  of  the  organs  of  speech  is 
concerned,  the  consonants ;>  and  6  are  identical;  the  sound 
of  the  former,  however,  is  produced  by  the  breath  only, 
while  the  latter  requires  the  assistance  of  the  voice,  which 
commences  before  the  lips,  the  organs  by  which  the  articula- 
tion is  produced,  are  disconnected.  The  same  remarks  apply 
to  each  of  the  other  pairs  of  abrupts,  as  the  reader  will  dis- 
(ovrr  by    peaking  the  illustrative  words  in  connection. 


■  »••  'f^^r^^^m 


■  pal     I  tMrnam 


ml  by  a  liifltt 
I,  the  phono- 
It  mukoii  tlio 
bout  it  liut 
lit(ht  Htrokoii 
tlio  thickncHH 
riously  nffect 
t'd  phoiiojfra- 
wore  written 
could  hardly 


called  explo- 
de  or(,'anH   of 
the    outward 
are   ci({ht   in 
appropriately 
right  lincB,  as 
zed   lotterH  of 

■        locA*. 
\ag. 

und  of  p  with 
ction  of  ivhis- 
preciated.  As 
«  of  apueuli  is 
:al;  the  sound 
3  breath  only, 
e  voice,  whicii 
;h  the  articula- 
remarks  "pply 
aador  wiU  dis- 
inection . 


'i^fmtiip".  '  iiwii-i 


*^^bril^AAA**Mh«i^k,^^^^^ 


k*«iAAAAilkA*A**iih*A«A*Ad 


«\M!AI.    or    I'llUMXJK.VIUV, 


21 


2.  C..«tii»r;*j|rs:_Tho  organ-i  of  apr  h  am  in  contact 
in  the  production  of  lliese  el»  nicnts,  yot  ■  •  so  fuiuly  m 
to  totally  obstruct  the  ^y.l  .^^  .,1  |,roath,  oi  ,.ice;  but  the 
tounds  may  I-  continued  any  length  „(  timi'  Thurr  are 
al«o,  eight  of  II  ■  oleraonf— half  of  thorn  wU,s|M«r(.,i  and 
half  spoken;  iin.i  lu^y  ar  «f  a  flow  n;r,  yi,.|dinir  nut  -o, 
they  are  approprii...ly  represeiitod  by  ,  urve.l  an.f  llowi.i.r 
signs;  thus: 

Whhpcml,      K^Bd/c,         ^  wren</(, 
^nken,  ^«aw,        i    wren/ 


)    bUM,       _J 
)  bu«,       ^ 


luim. 


\ '  'I'on. 

n.    LiQuiiw:— These  are  »•  and  (.  and  are  nilled  liquid,  ho- 
cause  they  readily   run  into  r.r   iinito   with  other  consonant 
sounds.      They    aro  not  distn 
■ounJ,  as  the  abrupts  and  conl.i 
light  curves;  thus: 


lished    by    any  variiii    )n   of 
•  nis,  and  are  represented  by 


4.  NASAM:-Tho  sounds  of  w,  ,  und  ng,  are  called  nasals 
from  the  fact  that  the  organs  are  br,  rht  in  complete  contact, 
and  the  voice  driven  through  the  n  ^e.  The  w  and  n  aro 
represented  by  the  two  re.naining  ligh  curves,  and  ng  by  the 
heavy  curve  corresponding  to  h,  as  b.  ng  nearly  related  to 
that  sound;  thus: 


sewji, 


'  Been, 


Bin^ 


5.  CoALEscBNT8:-rana  .o  hold  a  medial  character  be- 
tween  the  vowels  and  consonants:  w  being  a  weak  sound  or 
modification  of  O)  (,«),  and  y  a  niudificati  n  of  /■  {ee).  They 
never  occur  in  English  except  before  a  )wel,  with  which 
they  closely  coalesce.  The  following  are  i  heir  phonographic 
signs,  and  the  words  illustrating  thoir  powers. 


^  way, 


r 


yen. 


^f^^^TT^  lll>»»»»»»» 


" ' I  'Ti^^im^^if^;;^^ 


1 


-^•' 


tf-----'****^ 


h^AAAAAA^krfkAAA^^ 


<>'> 


INTRODUrXlON    TO   TIIK 


(i  AsriBATE  :— The  power  of  h  is  simply  a  breathincr  up- 
on tlic  followinfT  vowel,  ond  is  ^reiiuraiiy  represented  by  a 
lijrht  dot  placed  before  the  vowel;  but  a  consonant's  lorm 
is'sonictimes  needed,  which  is  written  thus:  ^  h. 

VuWKL    ABni^NGEMENT:*-In   order    to  represent  twelve 
vowel  .ounds  bv  the  two  si-ns,  a  dot  and  a  dash,  a  scheme 
similar  to  that  of  representing  musio.il  sounds  by  the  round 
note  is  resorted  to.     As  the  vowels  rarely  occur  except  in 
connection  with  a  consonant,  t.h.y  »re  indicated  by  the  posi- 
tion in  which  the  dot  or  d.sh  is  placed  to  the   consonant 
stroke:  thus,  a  dot  placed   at  the  l,e«innin-.  of  a  consonant 
represents  the  voweW  (ee,)  at  the  middle,  H  (.fro.)  at  the 
end  a  (ah;)  the  dash  at  the  beginning  is  O  (awe,)  at  the  mu- 
dle,'o  (owe.)  at  the  end,  to  (o..)     The  remaining  si.x  vowels 
are  shorter  brief,  as  con.pnred  with  the  fore^'oing  six,  and  are 
appropriately  represented  by  the  dot  and  dash  in  the  same 
manner,  but  made  JiglUer;  and  all  that  has  been  saul  in  regard 
to  li-rht  and  heavy  consonants  applies  to  the  vowels.     In  the 
following  illustration  the  vowel  signs  are  placed  to  a  dotted 
line  merely  to  indicate  the  position  of  the  dot  and  dash;  it  is 
no  part  of  the  vowel.     The  italic  letters  in  the  accompany- 
ing  words  suggest  the  vowel  sounds: 


\  ee], 


ale, 


I  arm, 


•  rtm, 


■  on, 


-•  ortk, 
i  Mp, 


:  ooze, 
I  wood, 


•^11,         AeU, 

DiPHTHONGs:-These  being  compound  sounds,  and  all  the 
simple  characters  being  otherwise  disposed  o*"'  ^^^y  ^'^  '®P; 

*  For  the  greater  simplification  ..f  I'lmnography,  there  is.  ordinarily, 
no  distinction  m».1e  between  the  sound  of  .  in  ui.rcy  ""'1  th'.t  of  .  m 
m«,y;  between  a  in  dare,  and  a  in  d«te;  nor  between  a  m  f<»'  ^^  «  "' 
far.  Tbe  signs  tor  rcprosenling  these  three  sound,  (?•  V"\°'lTl  u! 
with  various  foreign  sounds,  are  provided  on  p»ge  127,  which  may  be 
Tdojued  by  the  proficient  phonographer.  if  he  wishes  to  be  very  accural, 
in  the  representation  of  spoken  words.  ^^____ 


»•*•¥••»»•••*''*" 


FVW***^**^"^^^"" 


■.-.<I«&M»  »^  «L'«iurt!*»SP3tf  iSJicS*)*^^ 


"fli 


lathint;  up- 
:ntfi(l  by  a 
lant's  form 

ent  twelve 
1,  a  scheme 
r  the  round 
r  except  in 
by  tlio  posi- 

I  consonant 

II  consonant 
/jro.)  at  the 
)  iit  the  inid- 
T  six  vowels 

six,  and  are 
in  the  same 
aid  in  regard 
els.  In  the 
[1  to  a  dotted 
d  dash;  it  is 

accompany- 


;  ooze, 

i  wood, 

s,  and  all  the 
they  are  rep- 

3  is,  ordinarily, 
nd  that  of  «  in 
in  ia»t  and  a  in 
and  a,)  together 
r,  which  may  be 
be  very  accurate 


^M»^*A<Xi*****'^^**i**«>i«i****'*********'*** 


*AAAAA«iA*A^^A^<kA^ 


MANUAL  OP  PUONOGRAPHY. 


23 


resented  by  complex  signs.      They  will  be  understood  by 
the  following  illustration: 


0M)1, 


new. 


I  tsle,  '  j  o»l,  ^. 

Triputhongs: — These  result  from  the  union  of  w  with 
each  of  the  above  diphthongs,  which  are  more  convenient  to 
represent  by  single  characters  than  otherwise;  thus: 


\  toine, 


!  quoit, 


wound. 


ORGANIC  CLA.'^SIKICATION  OF  CONSONANTS. 


Abriipts. 


Cmtin- 
uanta. 


^  Wlhinpered. 

\  Sjyuken, 

C  Whispered. 

i  S}>nken. 


Liquids. 

Resonants, 

Avd)igues. 


\b 


^w 


-J -a 
It 

(th) 
("'     ) 


II 


1 

3 
*A 

3 

o 

—  k 

—  g 


In  the  above  division  of  the  consonant  sounds,  reading  in 
columns  downwards,  we  begin  with,  (1)  those  formed  at  the 
lips,  08/),  6,/,  (fcc,  and  call  them  Lahiah;  (2)  wo  then  go 
back  to  the  region  of  the  tip  of  the  tongue  and  the  teeth, 
where  t,  d,  &c.,  are  formed,  which  class  we  term  Idiigm-Den- 
tah,  (tongue-teeth  sounds;)  (3)  then  to  the  hard  palate  or 
roof  of  the  mouth,  a  little  back  of  the  teeth,  where  we  find 
ch,j,sh,  &c.,  which  we  call  Liiiguo- Palatals;  and,  finally,  to 
the  root  of  the  tongue,  near  the  throat,  where  Jc,  g,  &c.,  are 
formed,  which  we  term  QuUurals,  or  Throat- Sounds. 

A  practicol  arrangement  of  the  whole  alphabet,  for  refer- 
ence in  study,  etc.,  will  be  found  on  the  next  page. 


NH(iWI|^^^ 


JiHJ p^nm^^^^F^yy^iy^^y^^nwn 


:ifaBaite«*wajS«A*)«Bis»«»«»'i 


II 1  n  m 


1 

Ml 

^r 

for 

■>  m 

SGcm 

_^n 

seen 

^B 

&ing 

>w 

tony 

y 

yea 

^h 

^nd 

I    i    tsle 


oil 


^i    «    owl 


nl    n    dwpe 

'the  phonetic 
haracters  em- 
lettera  of  the 
for  occasional 
e  beauty  and 
lessons  must 


1 


■»T»»*»^»"W"»"^w 


mml  0f  f  |on0grap^2. 


lesson  1. 

THE  CONSONANTS  AND  LONG  VOWELS. 

If  the  student  who  is  desirous  of  acquiring  the  phono- 
graphic art,  has  attentively  read  the  preceding  introduc- 
tion, and  obtained  a  clear  idea  of  the  phonetic  principle, 
he  will  find  no  difficulty  in  mastering  the  course  of  les- 
sons which  follows.  Regular  daily  study  and  patient 
practice  for  a  few  weeks,  will  accomplish  the  object. 

Let  every  paragraph  be  carefully  read  and  compared 
with  the  accompanying  illustrations,  and  every  shorthand 
character  and  exercise  copied,  pronouncing  at  the  same 
time  the  sound  of  the  letter  or  word  aloud. 

Ruled  paper  should  be  used;  even  paper  with  a  double 
ruling,  the  lines  just  wide  enough  apart  to  admit  the 
proper  length  of  the  consonants  between  them,  is  a  great 
advantage,  at  first,  in  enabling  the  learner  to  make  hie 
consonants  of  a  uniform  length. 

Until  the  pupil  becomes  familiar  with  the  signs,  a 
pencil  should  be  employed  in  preference  to  a  pen;  after 
which  either  a  pen  or  pencil  may  be  used;— it  should 
be  held  loosely  between  the  thumb  and  second  finger, 
with  the  first  resting  on  top,  as  in  drawing  or  ordinary 
writing;  or,  between  the  first  and  second  fingers,  keep- 
ing it  in  place  by  a  slight  pressure  of  the  thumb. 


1 


'I:: 


Ill "^ 

MANUAL   OP   niONOORArilY. 


k***^**^^^^^^^ 


I  I       -  -  -  I  I  ■ «« 

26 

A  Rood  stylo  of  writing  can  only  be  obtained  by  en- 
deavoring, in  the  commencement,  to  form  the  characters 
with  mathematical  precision.     After  a  little  e^P«"«"«« 
in  tracing  the  forms  accurately,  the  learner  will  find  no 
difficulty  in  executing  them  rapidly;  the  attempt  to  write 
swiftly  at  first,  on  the  other  hand,  will  not  only  delay  the 
attainment,  but  lead  to  ungraceful  and  illeg.be  writing. 
Let  the  pupil  now  take  his  jen  or  pencil,   and   go 
through  the  list  of  consonants,  writing  them  as  on  the 
following  page,  speaking  at  the  same  time  the  power  of 
each  letter;  and  carefully  observing  the  light  and  heavy 
character  of  the  signs,  and  their  proper  length 

1  Commence  the  strokes  so  that  when  of  the  proper 
length  they  will  rest  on  the  line  of  writing.  The  con- 
sonants  should  be  written  about  the  size  of  those  gnren 
in  these  pages;  and  particular  attention  should,  at  first 
be  observed  in  writing  the  curved  thick  letters,  making 
them  thick  in  the  middle  only,  and  tapering  to  a  light 
line  toward  each  extremity. 

2  The  perpendicular  and  inclined  consonants  are 
written  from  the  top  downward,  as  \p,  U  ^r;  the 
horizontal  ones  are  written  from  left  to  right;  as  —  &, 

1"*'Th^"etter  ^  I,  when  the  only  consonant  in  t 
word,  is  always  written  upward;  at  other  times  it  may 
be  written  either  upward  or  downward,  as  is  most  con- 

''^r *°The  J  «fc  is  always  written  downward  when  the 
only  consonant  in  a  word,  and  either  downward  or  up- 

ward  at  other  times.  j  .  .n 

5.    The  aspirate  ^  h  is  written  upward  under  all 

circumstances.  v    •  * 


f5»5t*55^^*"''*''' 


PW^W*"***^ 


»*w****^»**»*' 


>» ■ 


I  i  III  *'mk\k 


l*****A*'i' 


led  by  cn- 
characters 
experience 
rill  find  no 
ipt  to  write 
y  delay  the 
)le  writing, 
il,   and   go 
I  as  on  the 
10  power  of 
and  heavy 
h. 

'  the  proper 
The  con- 
those  given 
uld,  at  first, 
ers,  making 
g  to  a  light 

iBonants  are 
\t,'^r;  the 
'ht;  as — k, 

isonani  in  t, 
timea  it  may 
is  most  con- 


ird  when  the 
reward  or  np- 

ird  under  all 


■ 


llrt''T1'''''J 


ON  WBITINQ  THE  CONSONANTS. 


27 


EXERCISE  ON  THE  CONSONANTS. 

P,B  \\  \\  \\  W  \\  \\  \.\ 

T,D   II    II   II    II    II    II   II 

ch,j  yy  //  //  //  //  //  // 

K,  G •  — 

F,V  V.^  VV  ^V  V^  VV  ^^  ^V 
Th.Th((  (((((((((((( 
S.Z   ))   ))   ))   ))   ))   ))   )) 

sh.zh  J  J  J  J  J  J  J  J  J  J  yj  yy 

^rrrrrrrrrr 


B 


"^  "^  ">.  ">»  ^ 


^ 


^  ^  '^ 


II  /^^^^^./^'^^ 


'^'^>'*^'^*WV^*i<P*W<|iWV«WVW!VWVWt 


«* 


I   -■-'       I ** 


28 


k******AM 


I 


MANUAL  OP   rilONOGUAl'UY. 


COMBINATIONS  OP  CONSONANTS. 

6  In  commencing  to  write  a  word,  the  f  rst  thing 
the  learner  has  to  do  is  to  pronounce  it  slowly,  and 
ascertain  what  are  the  elementary  sounds  of  which  it  la 
composed,  and  then  write  the  consonant  signs,  as  here- 
tofore  directed,  without  lifting  the  pen  till  all  are  written. 

7  When  the  first  consonant  to  be  written  requires  a 
downward  stroke,  it  is  commenced  its  length  above  the 
line  of  writing  and  struck  to  the  line,  and  if  a  downward 
stroke  follows,  it  is  carried  on  below  the  line;  thus,  ^^ 
^d  --Ldp-  if  the  first  consonant  is  a  horizontal  stroke, 
and  a  d^wn-stroke  follows,  it  is  written  above  the  line 
and  the  second  one  carried  to  it;  thus,  H  H  Z"^'^' 
but  if  an  up-stroke  sign  follows  the  horizontal,  the  latter 
should  be  written  on  the  line;    thus,  ^_/^»tZ,  — T  «*• 

8  When  a  straight  consonant  follows  another  of  the 
same  kind,  the  two  are  written  by  a  stroke  double  the 
usual  length;  as  kk,  \j>p. 

9  In  reading  the  consonants  in  a  word,  they  must 
of  course  be  uttered  in  the  order  in  which  th^  were 
written;  thus,  for  example,  in  reading  Y  t^«         °'^^* 
be  read  first,  because  it  is  evident  it  was  written  first,  as 
the  writer  could  not  have  begun  at  the  angle  and  written 
the  X  and  t^^^n  gone  back  and  written  the        ,  without 
violating  the  rule  requiring  the  skeleton  of  a  word  to 
be  written  b"'"  ng  the  pen;  and  he  could  not  have 
begun  at  tl               -  of  the   / ,  and  written  it  upwards 
and  then  the         backwards,  without  violating  the  two 
rules,  that  ch  is  to  be  written  downwards  and  n  from 

left  to  right. 

It  sometimes  happens  that  a  consonant  which  seems 
to  be  farther  along  than  another  in  the  line  of  writing. 


,.i_H^LI      ..H»-,'"?"'" 


f  rst  thing 
ilowly,  and 
■which  it  ia 
IS,  as  herc- 
are  written. 
1  requires  a 
1  above  the 
El  downward 
;  thus,  -^  — 
ntal  stroke, 
)ve  the  line 
\kd,  VncA; 
il,  the  latter 

I,  f^kl 

other  of  the 
double  the 

I,  they  must 
h  they  were 
he         must 
itten  first,  as 
i  and  written 
,  without 
)f  a  word  to 
>uld  not  have 
jn  it  upwards 
iting  the  two 
1  and  n  from 

which  seems 
le  of  writing. 


»»»W*»^F»»»*^ 


>^A^^>^0**********< 


bA*«*A***********^***^^^*' 


CONSONANT   COMBINATIONS. 


29 


must  be  read  first;  as^ ;  but  from  the  fact  that  /  is 
always  to  be  written  downward,  we  know  the  letters  are 
to  be  read  j7  and  not  Ij.  By  a  little  observation  of  this 
kind  the  learner  will  soon  see  at  a  glance,  and  without 
thought,  how  any  word  is  to  be  read. 

The  exercise  which  follows  should  first  be  read,  tracing 
the  characters  with  a  pointer;  in  doing  which  either  the 
powers  of  the  letters  may  be  used,  as  t  k,  kt,  p  k,&c., 
or  the  names,  te  ka,  ka  te,  pe  ka,  &c.;  in  class  teaching 
the  latter  method  is  the  best,  after  having  drilled  the 
learners  well  in  speaking  the  simple  powers  of  the  alpha- 
bet. After  reading  the  exercise  in  this  way,  it  should 
bo  neatly  copied  with  pen  or  pencil,  and  again  read. 


EXERCISE  ON  CONSONANT  COMBINATIONS. 


L  n 


un  ^  -7 


FWV^W^P^^^^^'^'''" 


(••••5i5*55555^^^»*»**"'**'' 


il 


k  ^*A^*A*<h^k****A4 


30 


MANUAL   OF   I'llONOURAIMIY. 


LOXQ  VOWELS. 


as  in 


eat, 


•la 

ape, 


arm, 


\0 
aw^, 


oak, 


Jci) 
ooze. 


I 


10.  The  above  table  illustrates  the  manner  of  writing 
the  six  long  vowels.  The  dotted  line  represents  the 
length  of  any  consonant,  to  which  the  vowel  sign,  (tlie 
dot  or  dash,)  may  be  written  in  either  of  three  places, 
the  beginning,  middle  or  end. 

11.  The  heavy  dot  at  the  first  place,  or  beginning  of 
any  consonant,  is  always  €;  at  the  second  place,  or  mid- 
dle, a.-  at  the  third  place,  or  end,  q.  The  heavy  dash 
at  the  first  place  is  0/  at  the  second  place  O,-  at  the 
third  place  O, 

12.  The  proper  sounds  of  these  dots  and  dashes,  in 
their  several  positions,  should  be  well  memorized.  They 
may  bo  designated  thus: —  C  is  the  first  place  heavy  dot; 
a  is  the  second  place  heavy  dot;  q  is  the  third  place 
heavy  dot;  0  is  first  place  heavy  dush;  O  is  the  second 
place  heavy  dash;  (0  is  the  third  place  heavy  dash. 

13.  In  vocalizing  the  consonnntd,  that  is,  in  placing 
the  vowels  to  them,  they  should  be  written  near  the 
strokes,  but  not  so  that  they  will  join;  thus,  *^  nr, 
\  pay,  ^T^  may;  the  dashes  should  be  written  at  right 
angles  with  the  consonants;  as,  \  pau;  , -{  s/ioir,  |_  too. 

14.  If  we  wish  the  vowel  to  be  read  first,  we  place 
it  before  or  above  the  consonant;  thus,  |  eat,  is^  ape, 
^-^  aim,  _i_  oak;  if  we  wish  it  to  be  read  after  the 
consonant,  we  write  it  after  or  below  the  stroke;  thus, 
.\  how,   ^  hay,  ^  shoe. 

15.  The  rule  for  placing  and  reading  the  vowels  is, 
that  the  first  place  is  at  the  end  where  the  pen  began 
writing  the  consonant;  thus,  see  the  L-line  in  the  follow- 


1 


JO 

,         ooze. 

of  writing 
esents  the 
sign,  (the 
CO  places, 

ginning  of 
jc,  or  mid- 
eavy  dash 
Qi   at  the 

dashes,  in 
!cd.  Tlicy 
heavy  dot; 
hird  place 
the  second 
dash. 

in  placing 
1  near  the 

IS,    *^    CtY, 

cu  at  right 
ow,  |_  too. 
,  we  place 
at,  i\  ape, 
after  the 
rokc;  thus, 

e  vowels  is, 

pen  began 

I  the  follow- 


^•*****<ki 


KXKKCISE    ON    TUB    I-ONU    VOWELS. 


31 


ing  exercise,  where  ^  being  written  upward,  e  and  0 
are  placed  at  the  lower  end,  and  q  and  (0  at  the  top; 
y  must  be  vocalized  in  the  same  manner. 

The  following  exercise  should  be  read  over  frequently, 
till  the  learner  acquires  the  correct  sounds  of  the  vowels 
and  their  consecutive  order.  He  will,  at  the  same  time, 
become  familiar  with  many  of  the  consonants.  The 
sounds  of  the  vowels  arc  indicated  by  key-letters  at 
the  top  of  each  column;  and  each  lino  is  preceded  by 
the  type  letter  of  the  consonant  employed  in  the  line. 

EXERCISE    ON    THE   LONO    VOWELS. 

VOWELS    KOLLOWIXQ    COSaOSASTS. 

E  u  a  0  O  <J) 


r      I- 


T0WBL8   PBECIDISQ    COSSOXAJtIS. 

^ 


J 


-^    '^     "^ 


•••PW*******'*'*'*** 


>w*vwww^m^«^^ 


^^^fc>*^**J 


MaM^I*«>»***'k*iM**'M 


kalaMkAAAA' 


32 


MANUAL   OF    PIIONOOllAPHY 


READINO     LESSON,    WITH    A    KEY. 

In  the  following  exercise  the  learner  has  a  key  to 
assist  him  in  decyphering  the  phonographic  construction 
of  words.  It  should  be  well  studied,  preparatory  to 
reading  and  writing  the  exorcises  which  follow. 


te 


te 


|-      to 


to 


ot 


et  'I         rt  "I       et  -I 

I-,      texa  -^     Urn.  ll-      tak  L-       tek 

^      knt  i      kot               N  kzp             >    k<i»p 

/^kel  _/'  kol         —/    mol  ..7-/      mol 

^-■, mek  --r- — mak  __--^kam  — ^•-*  kq,m 

pel  "V^pal         X/^pol          V""   pal 


~V-. 


rem 


X^ 


rom 


.V-.  Vra       \^  } 


ta>m 


After  the  exercise  has  been  read  once  or  twice,  it  is 
a  good  plan  to  lay  a  strip  of  paper  over  the  key,  and 
read  without  the  aid  of  the  printed  words.  Then  re- 
verse  the  process:  laying  the  strip  of  paper  over  the 
phonographic  words,  and  write  them  from  memory  of 
their  form,  or  knowledge  of  their  construction. 


m p^^^ipyyy^^w 


•>  » iii^^^^^^¥wm 


mimifftiiti0t 


a  key  to 
nstruction 
iratory  to 

t<B 

ot 


tek 

N 

k(Dp 

^ 

mol 

,  ^ 

k(im 

\ 
^ 

pa>l 

I       Ubm 

twice,  it  is 
e  key,  and 
Then  re- 
ar over  the 
memory  of 
tn. 


^^^i^l^^MI^*^^^*— **— ^a****!***^ 


i^^k*******' 


ON    VOCAMZINO. 


83 


In  reading  the  following  exercise  the  learner  must  re- 
ly on  his  own  knowledge.  If  lie  fails  in  remembering 
the  consonants,  he  will  have  to  turn  back  to  page  27  to 
refresh  his  memory;  and  if  the  gounda  of  the  vowels  are 
forgotten,  page  30  will  assist  him. 

Beadino  Exercise  I. 

^  1  .r  \  /'  /•   '"  (■ )'  ^' 

X-l     _!_■(     ^    VI.    X/<     -7-     ^     (- 

0    1-   I-  -,  <^  - 

ic^  /<v  r\  /rv~\^  '~\- 

^    1    ^-   ^^   /    >    "> 

ON    VOCALIZING. 

16.  In  vocalizing  the  consonant  of  a  word,  the  firgt 
thing  to  be  done  is  to  ascertain  whether  the  vowel 
to  be  written  is  a  dot  sign  or  a  dash  sign;  and,  secondly, 
what  place  to  the  consonant  it  should  occupy. 


»»ttllHI»»ll 


>»»T»  ■  »  »» ^ 


HMM**^ 


84 


MAMAI,    <•*'    I'l|liN<»lH.\l'll^  . 


17.  If  the  loarncr'.'t  nu'iiiory  is  not  pood,  or  hi«  pprccp 
tion  quifk,  bo  tlmt  ho  can  decide  theso  points  readily, 
good  plan  for  arriving  at  the  rcHult  is  to  eonimcnce  at 
the  beginning  of  tin-  scnlo  of  vowolsand  speak  them  thus: 
/",  a,  q,  (obsorvini:  that  thus  far  tho  signs  arc  heavy  dots, 
and  that  tho  remainder  are  dashes,)  0,  O,  fl),  till  ho 
arrives  at  tho  one  ho  wishes  to  write;  just  as  tho  learner 
of  music,  when  he  cannot  stiike  tho  proper  sound  of  ii 
note,  commences  at  do  and  runs  up  tho  scale  till  ho 
obtains  the  proper  sound. 

IG.  Words  containing  only  horizontal  consonants,  if 
tho  accented  vowels  arc  first  place,  are  written  about  the 
height  of  a  vertical  stroke  above  the  line;  as  *  '  vn; 
'  hi/;  if  the  vowels  are  second  or  third  place,  they 
arc  written  on  the  line;  as,  -__  yai/,  ^-p  viow. 

NoTK.— For  tho  purjinje  of  a.«.<liitinn  tlip  Icnrnpr  until  ho  hpcomci  fn- 
miliiir  with  iihoiictic  printing,  n  few  of  tho  first  uxercisos  for  writing  will 
bo  printud  in  both  mudoit  of  spelling. 

WlllTING    EXEUCISK    I. 

First  tlack  Dot,  after  the  cousouant. — 
Pea,    tea,    key,  fee,  see,  she,  lee,  me,  knee. 
Pe,     tc,      kc,      fe,     sr,    Jc,      le,     me,     ne. 
He/ore  the  consonant. — Kat,  each,  eke,  eve,  ease,  eel,  car. 
L't,    tq,      ck,    cv,     cz,    cl,    er. 

Skcond  place  Dot,  ii/l>r  the  conmnant. — 
Pay,  day,  gay,  they,  say,  may,  way,  hay. 
Pa)     da,     gu,      rtn,       sn,     mu,     wa,    ha. 
Bifore. — Ape,  eight,  aid,   age,  ache,  ale,  air,  aim. 
Up,    at,       ad,     aj,      ak,      al,    ^r,    am. 

Third  place  Dot,  after  the  consonant. — Pa,  ma. 

P(V,  mq. 

Before. — Are. 

flr. 


V> II  i»»»»m HI' ' " 


I  .a. 


^AAAAAArf 


REVIEW    OP    TIIK    KIU8T    LEHHON. 


'X> 


in  rciiilily,  . 
Liinmcitce  ut 
i  them  thuw; 
J  hciivy  dotrt, 
,  (D,  till  he 
I  the  K'liriuir 
sound  of  II 
luulu  till   he 

msonants,  if 

in  about  the 

as    •    ^  «!'■, 

|)lncc,  thoy 

low, 

ho  Iioponici  fn- 
for  writing  will 


ice. 

IB. 

ease,  eel,  car. 
cz,    cl,    er. 


air,  aim. 
^r,     am. 

'a,  ma. 


'(V,  mq. 


FiBST  PLACE  Dahii,  after  thr,  conmmant.-^ 

Paw,  jaw,  thaw,  Haw,  l.iw,  gnaw. 
Po,      jo,      to,        80,      lo,      no. 

5(/orc.— Ought,  awed,  awl,  awn. 
Ot,  od,       ol,      on. 

Second  place   dasii,   after   tU  contonnnt.—ljoyf,  too, 

Uo,      to, 

dough,  foe,  though,  bow,  show,  low,  know,  woe,  hoe. 
do,         fo,     do,  m,     Jo,        lo,    no,       wo     ho. 

Jicfore.—OAe,  oak,  oath,  owc»,  oar,  own. 
Od,    ok,     ot,      oz,       or,     on. 

Third  place  Dash,  after  the  conionant.— Goo,  shoo.— 

Kct),    ju>. 

Before. — Oozo. 
(Dz. 

Rkvifw.-M.)  What  caro  .houlJ  bo  takon  In  writing  thr>  '^ovy  cnrvo.l 
•troke*?  (2.)  What  con»o.mnU  nro  written  downwanls  .'  H"W  aro  t  e 
horVzontal  one,  written  ?  What  nro  thcv  V  ( «  4. 1..^  5  \\  ^^J^'-^l 
cx.eption«  to  tho.o  Ronoml  rule*?  (fi.1  Wh«t Jf  »ho  f  r.  thu  «  to  bo 
ili.iiu  in  writinir  a  word  r  I'lnoRnM*!™"/ '  "hat  n'-xtr  (,?.)  "''".»J^° 
thooon.onant"\ajustc,l  to  the  lino  «£  writing?  (8...  When  one  .IrajKh 
c,n,nrnl  MlowAnother  of  the  .amo  kin.l.  h"'' •J"-.  '  '"y, .T'; ^J  „^,y 
What  U  tho  orrter  of  reading  the  consonant,  in  » '^J,^/,„  ('"•/.;';"?' 2  ) 
,,lttoea  have  con.onanU.  to  whi.;h  vowcU  may  bo  written ?  {Uj^  l-iJ 
Wh;»l  ia  the  sound  of  tho  first  pin™  hoavy  dot  f  Th.  8«™n'l '  '^^ 
llurd?  What  is  the  sound  of  the  {ir-t  pl.vco  heavy  dash  i  Ihe  (econd? 
Tie  third?    (13.)  Uow  should  tho  vowoU  bo  written  to  the  con^onanW? 

I     (   Triithe  V  mel  «mnd  of  a  word  U  hoard  h«f»'%'\V/'".*""''"/'  '° 
which  side  of  ^ho  por,K.ndio.ular  strokes  is  it  written  ?    Whieh  s.de  of  the 

I     Tnd  ned?    Whioh  of  the  hori/.ont.il  ?  ^  ( li. )  At  which  end  "f J  ""^  *  '» 
he  first  place  vowel  written?    [\f>.)\n  V'«al'»'"8.  ?  '°[f -J^*'  "  '*i° 

I     fi^t  thing  to  be  determined?    What  tho  second ?    (18.)  Uow  MO  wordi 
that  contain  only  a  horiiontal  stroke  written  1 


«>w^^^pwirv<rwi 


L 


' 


ww^m'tfi^^^'f^^^'^^^ 


"^te** 


***^ 


lesson  2. 


SHORT    VOWELS— riPHTHONGS— DOT    fl— VOCALIZING 
COMBINED   CONSONANTS. 

If  the  student  has  become  familiar  with  the  arrange- 
ment and  manner  of  writing  the  long  vowels,  it  will  be 
a  very  easy  matter  for  him  to  understand  and  use  the 
following  scale  of 


SHORT  VO^ 

(VELS. 

|e 

a 

"  0 

-ju 

et, 

at, 

on. 

up 

|i  je         .la  |o         iu         Ju 

as  in     it,  et,  at,  on,  up,         foot. 

The  six  vowel  sounds  above  given  approximate  so 
nearly  in  quality  to  those  given  on  page  30,  the  main 
difference  being  in  length  or  fulness,  that  they  are  repre- 
sented in  precisely  the  same  manner,  excepting  that  the 
signs  arc  made  lighter.   [See  Introduction,  pages  20,  21..] 

19.  The  proper  sounds  of  these  dots  and  dashes,  in 
their  several  positions,  must  be  well  memorized.  They 
may  be  designated  thus: — i  is  the  first  place  light  dot;  e 
is  the  second  place  light  dot;  a  is  the  third  place  light 
dot;  0  is  the  first  place  light  dash;  U  is  the  second  place 
light  dash ;  U  is  the  third  place  light  dash. 

As  a  general  thing  it  is  more  convenient,  and,  except 
in  analyzing  words,  it  is  just  as  well  to  name  the  short 
vowels  with  the  consonant  t  after  them;  thus:  it,  et,  at, 
ot,  ut,  oof. 


>^ 


(36) 


^■g*iSS< 


iim 


tlie  arrange- 
s,  it  will  be 
md  use  the 


11 
!P. 

roximatc  so 
0,  the  main 
ey  are  repre- 
;ing  that  the 
iage8  20,  21.] 
id  dashes,  in 
•ized.  They 
3  light  dot;  e 
>  place  light 
second  place 

,  and,  except 
ne  the  short 
lus:  if,  ct,  at, 


»  »»»  fwww^^rwTW 


i««t»«iiiit*< 


i^^^A^^Aai^AA^A^A^iAAA^AA*^*****^* 


EXERCISE  ON   TUE   8U0RT   VOWELS. 


The  following  exercise  on  the  short  vowel  scale  should 
be  practised  till  their  consecutive  order  is  well  mastered, 
and  the  position  of  each  sound  can  be  told  without  hesi- 
tation. 

Reading  Exercise  II. 


\ 

Writing  Exercise  II. 

First  place  light  Dot.— Pit,  tip,  pil,  pib,  dip,  mil. 

Second  plack  light  Dot. — Eb,  cj,  eg,  bel,  tel. 

Third  place  light  Dot.— Ad,  am,  lak,  bak. 

First  place  light  Dash.— Od,  of,  top,  got,  fok,  lok,  mok, 

foli,  bodi. 
Secokd  place  light  Dash.— Up,  us,  kut,  luk,  luv. 
Third  place  light  Dash.— Pul,  buk,  tuk,  ruk,  luk,  kuk, 

puli,  fuli. 


p^wv«ww«<rwvw«v«*«^r«w«v«*w«'w<«'^FV  • PW»»W*W***^ 


■seEiSSB*^»Bi?.1^f*'^ 


IIIIH«I1«««« «!■■«< 


b^Mi*A*AA*A*AAA^^AAAA< 


38 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOORAPIIY. 


li 


as  m      ice. 


mPHTHONGS. 
oil, 


owl. 


„1U 
new. 


20.  These  diphthong  characters,  excepting  n  ,*  oc- 
cupy but  two  places,  the  beginning  and  end  of  a  conso- 
nant. When  written  in  t'.e  first  phice,  with  the  point 
downward,  the  angle  represents  the  first  sound  in  ice; 
thus,  X^  pie,  (J thy,  <^^  my;  with  the  point  upward, 
in  the  same  place,  the  first  sound  in  oil;  thus,  \  loy, 
"^  coy;  with  the  point  upward,  and  in  the  third  place, 
the  first  sound  in  oivl;  as,  "^  our,  -,_^  now.  The  char- 
acters should  be  written  without  lifting  the  pen,  and 
placed  in  a  perpendicular  position  to  the  inclined  and 
horizontal  strokes,  as  well  as  to  the  vertical. 


Beasinq  Exercise  III. 

Wkiting  Exercise  IIT. 

Bi,  ti,  fi  vi,  di,  si,  Ji,  U,  mi,  ni;  is,  iz,  jl,  ir,  isi.     Ber,  te, 
je,  kff ;  el,  ancr.    B»,  dv,  ks,  \s,  sy,  alw,  az ;  ^t,  vr,  »1. 


*  This,  though  representing,  ordinarily,,  the  pure  diphthong,  is  also  em- 
ployed in  an  extended  scheme  of  compound  rowels,  which  will  bo  treated 
of  hereafter. 


r^^wwvwm >»■>! 


w^^w^^^^^^^^^f^f^w^m  > 


- 1llt«t» lltl««< 


THE   DOT   n. 


39 


it 


21.  Dot  //. — Since  the  aspirate  never  occurs  in  Eng- 
lish except  before  a  vowel,  a  briefer  mode  of  rcprcscnt- 
in{,'  it  than  the  long  sign  /"  is  generally  employed, 
namely,  a  light  dot  placed  immediately  before  the  vowel; 
it  should  be  written  to  the  left  of  the  dot  vowels  that 
belong  to  a  vertical  or  inclined  stroke,  and  above  those 
belonging  to  horizontals;  and  above  the  divih  vowels  of 
the  former,  and  to  the  left  of  those  of  the  latter;  thus, 

7h>,  A~.  hem,  "|  hod,  "^  her,  ^l^  home. 

Although  this  h  is  the  same  in  shape  as  the  light  dot 
vowels,  it  need  never  'cad  to  any  mistake,  from  the  fact 
that  no  dot  vowel  ever  occurs  immediately  before  another 
dot  vowel.     For  the  stroke,  h  will  be  italicized. 

Reading  Exercise  IV. 
•J 


Writing  Exercise  IV. 

Long  Vowels.— Het,  hat,  bed,  hel,  hal,  her,  h^r;  hop,  hap, 

hod,  hok,  hoi,  hom. 
First  place  light  Dot.— Hip,  hit,  hiq,  hil,  him. 
Second  place  light  Dot. — Hcd,  hej,  hem. 
Third  place   light  Dot.— Hat,  had,   hag,  hak,  ham,  hau, 

hapi. 
First  place  light  Dash. — Hop,  hot,  hog,  hod. 
Second  place  light  Dash.— Hub,    hut,    huf,   bul,    hum 

huo- 
Diphthongs. — Hit,  hjd,  hlv. 


I ^^i^^^w>r^^^9w^i^>^F^rwr^^ 


;| 


^,^^^^^^^^^tt^  llt«t»tt««««  fc^AA<>^J  >  «  tt»t 


40 


MANUAL   OP   I'lIONOdKAI'UY. 


VOCALIZING   COMRISED   CONSONANTS. 

22.  In  vocalizing  two  or  morfc  consonants  it  is  very 
important  to  keep  the  vowel  »if,'ns  uwny  finm  the  angles 
or  places  where  the  consonants  join,  especially  from  the 
inside  of  angles,  as  in  siuh  positions  it  is  impossible  to 
tell  to  which  stroke  they  belong  ;  thus,  it  cannot  be  told 
whether  V.^  is  the  word  hcam  or  halm. 
The  following  rules  should  be  observed: — 
Firtt.  When  a  first  place  vowel,  or  diphthong,  comes 
between  two  consonants  itjs  placed  immediately  after 
the  first ;  as  "^^  hyp,  not  "'X ,  where  it  is  before  the 

second  consonant;  '•"^^ — ■  imxk,  not  ;  . ^     kill, 

not '-^  't      i^-v  '>'eamy  ^    |  kite,  &c. 

Second.  A  second  place  vowel,  if  it  is  long,  is  also 
written  after  the  first  consonant;  as  "^  gale,  |:l,  dome; 
but  if  short,  it  is  written  before  the  second ;  as  "^  get, 
[j^  dumb;  by  which  arrangement  we  are  enabled  to  de- 
termine the  sound  of  the  middle  place  vowel  by  position, 
if  it  should  not  be  clearly  indicated  by  the  size. 

Third.  Third  place  vowels,  whether  long  or  short,  are 
written   before   the   second  consonant;   as     v^  balm, 
\  boot,  \    bad,  \ I  book,      I  doubt. 

ILLUSTRATIVE  EXEBCISE. 

^'^  V   ^•.  \   /-T      1- 


k^Fw*»w»w"w 


mr^rwvwvwwrww^ 


^^^^h*AA*rf 


i  it  is  very 
the  angles 
Ij-  from  tlic 
apossible  to 
finot  be  told 


bong,  comes 
liatcly  after 
}  before  the 
. ^  kill, 

ong,  is  also 
f,  };:^  dome; 
l;  as  "1  get, 
abled  to  de- 

by  position, 
iize. 
or  short,  are 

\,^  balm, 


VOCAMZINO   COMBINED   CONSONANTS. 


41 


! 


Fourth.  If  two  vowels  come  between  two  consonants, 
the  first  one  spoken  is  written  to  the  first  stroke,  and  the 
next  one  to  the  second  ;  thus,  NC;^  iwem,  V^  palliate. 

Some  deviations  from  those  rules  occur  in  contracted 
forms  of  writing;  but  their  general  observance  renders 
the  manuscript  more  legible  than  it  could  otherwise  be. 

24.  If  two  vowels  precede  the  first  consonant  in  a 
word,  the  first  is  written  farther  from  it  than  tho  second  ; 
thus,  ''-I  iotoi  if  it  terminate  with  two,  the  last  is  writ- 
ten farther  from  the  consonant  sign;  as,  ^|.  idea. 

25.  When  the  diphthong  ~*'  commences  a  word  it 
may  frequently  be  united  with  the  consonant  following, 
without  lifting  the  pen,  as  in  the  word  idea,  just  given, 
^\7^  /  believe,  'V^  /  fear,  &c. 

20.  In  reading  words  of  two  or  moru  consonants,  it 
must  be  observed  that  each  stroke,  and  the  vowel-sign  or 
signs  placed  to  it,  must  be  idd  precisely  as  they  would 
be  if  they  stood  unconnected  with  other  consonant 
strokes;  thus,  V7  read  in  this  way  would  be  considered 
thus:  \  /T  )■  Po-ii-<=>/;  ^nr  .'^  r  r  rtugh-ti-ly. 
This  procesi'  will  be  necessary  till  the  learner  can  read 
words  from  their  general  appearance. 


\\ 


■1»»»*B*!te*M! 


r 


in 


42 


MANUAL   OF   rnONOOUArilY. 


WlUTINU   KXEIICISE    V. 

LoNO  Dot  Vowels.— Bet,  bak,  bar,  prq,  bcim,  pad,  yml,  pam, 

tern,  dam,  W,  (led,  dat,  qcp,  qar,  <}cr,  qcf,  kep,  gat,  kcl,  gal, 

kcim,  kak.  Jam,  qrk,  cirm,   lep,  lat,  kif,  nav,  nam,  awak, 

awjir. 
Short  Dot  Vowels.— Bit,  pet,  pad,  piq,  be»,  ba;;,  pil,  del, 

rim,  lip,  lej,  liv,  maq,  mt-J,  maj,  mi!,  milk,  vali,  aAod. 
LoNO  Dash  Vowels.— Bot,  pop,  IkdI,  tot,  dor,  l(;d,  qok,  jok, 

kol,  kol,  kibl,  godi,  form,   vot,  l'u)d,  roum,  lof.  mol,  mmv, 

noti,  awok. 
Short  Dash  Vowkls.— Pot,  bu;;,  buk,  bodi,  dot,  doj,  du<r, 

kuk,  foli,  fuli,  Jok,  Juk,  log,  luk,  luk,  mok,  mug,  muj, 

nok,  nuk. 
Diphthongs.— rjl,  abid.bcrl.qid,  qim.abst,  mil,  dcka,  dela, 

avxd,  al»d,  ciij(T,  toior,  fjler. 

Get  me  mi  buk.  4  bclev  mi  be.  "!  Ma  i  go  hom  ns.  Put 
awa  mi  dul  nif. 

Rbvik-w.— (19.)  What  is  the  sound  of  the  first  place  light  dot  ?  Tho 
second?  The  third?  The  first  phice  light  d^h?  fhe  second  /  The 
third?  What  is  the  short  round  of  <f  a.'  <iA?  ««;?  cr.wr  (20.)  lo 
what  places  of  tho  consonant  are  tha  diphthongs  written  1  Uoscribe  the 
sign  and  i«8ition  of /.  Ot  oi.  Of  .w.  (21.  )AVhat  .s  the  second  form 
of  the  aspirate?  How  distinguished  from  vowels?  (22.)  n  vocalu.ng 
combine.1  consonants,  what  is  important?  What  is  the  rule  for  first  place 
vowels?  Second  place?  Third  place?  If  two  vowels  occur  between  two 
consonants,  how  are  they  written  ?  (23.)  If  two  vowels  pr«..cdo  a  cmso- 
nant  ?  If  two  terminate  a  word  ?  ( 2 1. )  How  may  J  sometimes  bo  writ- 
ton?  (25.)  What  is  the  rule  for  reading  words  coulainiiig  two  or  more 
consonants  and  their  accompanying  vowels. 


>^|>»HIHIIII» »» 


yy-  »»■» »»>iiiiiii 


l^^>^^lk*****d>***OA***<M 


t^tat«>k***dh**«i**********' 


leisBDn  3. 


Ll'-STROKES  n,  SH,  AND  i- VOWEL  WORD-SIGNS,  Ac, 

20.  In  order  to  prevent  words  from  running  too  far 
below  the  line  for  convenience  or  beauty,  and  to  afford  a 
variety  of  skeleton  outlines,  by  which  different  words 
having  the  same  consonant  sounds  may  be  written  differ- 
ently, and  thus  be  distinguished  without  being  vo(!alized, 
provision  is  made  for  representing  several  of  the  conso- 
nant sounds  by  both  upward  and  downward  strokes. 
This  provision  also  makes  the  writing  more  easy  of 
execution,  since  these  up-strokes  are  all  in  the  inclina- 
tion of  the  lino  of  writing,  from  left  to  right.  The 
letters  thus  represented  are  r,  »/t,  and  I;  the  former  of 
which,  only,  requires  a  different  character, 

27.  The  second  sign  for  r  is  a  straight  line  struck 
upward  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees;  thus,  y^  Though 
this  character  is  specially  available  in  writing  words  re- 
quiring two  or  more  consonants,  yet  it  is  frequently 
used  alone,  as  y^  ryr;  and  more  frequently  when  termi- 
nating with  a  circle  or  hook,  (Lessons  IV,  VI,)  when  it 
is  less  likely  to  be  confounded  with  <;/i,  written  down- 
ward and  of  nearly  the  same  inclination ;  in  neither  case, 
however,  is  there  any  diflSculty  experienced  by  the  adept, 
since  the  sense  of  the  preceding  words  nearly  always 
suggests  what  the  following  word  is. 

28.  When  written  in  connection  with  other  conso- 
nants, there  is  never  any  ambiguity,  since  it  can  be  seen 


rwv^'W^ 


(43) 


>****«***' 


t^^A,>^^AA*^xi«i^**i«i*^l******' 


4t 


MANUAL   OP   PHONOURAPHY. 


at  a  glance  whether  the  stroke  is  written  upward  or 
downward;  thus,  \y^  tr,  J  kh,  /\  rL  So  that  while 
the  rule  is  that  ch  shall  be  written  at  an  angle  of  sixty 
degrees,  and  r  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees,  they  may 
both  be  written  at  the  same  inclination,  except  when 
either  is  the  only  consonant  in  a  word,  and  except,  also, 
when  om  of  them  immediately  follows  the  other,  as  /^ , 
in  which  case  necessity  compels  one  to  bo  written  at  a 
different  inclination  from  the  other. 

29.  The  rule  that  the  beginning  of  a  consonant  stroke 
is  where  the  first-place  vowel  is  written,  and  the  krmina- 
tion  of  a  stroke  the  third-place,  rausi  bo  observed  in 
vocalizing  this  up-stroke  r;  thus,  ^-/reach,  /y\  ripe, 
/y^  charity. 

RULES  VOR  WBlTIXa  R  UPWARD  OR  DOWNWARD.* 

30.  The  following  rules  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
two  forms  of  r,  will  guide  the  learner  to  the  best  forms 

of  words: 

First.  The  up-stroke  should  be  used  when  the  follow- 
ing consonant  is  to  bo  written  downward,  as  in  the 
examples  above.     (29.) 

Second.  When  r  is  the  initial  letter  of  a  word,  and  is 
followed  by  the  s-circle,  7i-hook,  (see  Lessons  IV  and 
VIII,)  h,  g,  f,  I,  or  another  r,  the  up-strokeis  employed; 
asX~"  rogue,  .^  rash,  ^(  rule,  yT  rare.  But 
if  a  vowel  precede  r  as  the  first  consonant,  ^he  down- 
stroke  is  employed;  as,    '^^^—arc,""^     IrUk,    pearly, 

A_^^  error. 

Third.  Whenever  preceded  by  v,  th,  or  m,  the  upward 
r  is  employed ;  as  K^  veer,    {\/  theory,   Kp^mire. 


•  These  rules  mny  bo  pnssod  over  without  much  studying  at  first ;  but 
on  reviewing  the  lessons  Ihoy  sbouU  bo  well  unJerstood  and  applied. 


'^^^^wwm r^^^^wvww^'mr^ww^v^^'*'^^'^ 


mii^^^'S'#-^a^rl^L€«^ 


■»^»»<»pwiir' 


miliijijn! Ilili'"n1       IT" 


upward  or 
that  while 
trie  of  sixty 
m,  they  may 
xeept  when 
except,  also, 
ther,  as  /"/, 
writtou  at  a 

onant  stroke 
the  UrmiHa- 
obiierved  in 
h,  /(^\  ripe, 

XWARD.» 

e  use  of  the 
e  best  forms 

(I  the  foUow- 
1,  as  in   the 

word,  and  is 
sons  IV  and 
is  employed; 
rare.  But 
it,  the  down- 
h,    ■\^  early, 

I,  the  upward 

ring  nt  first ;  but 
)d  and  applied. 


,^^^^^^^ 


ON    WRITINO    THE    Ul'-STROKE    R. 


45 


Fourth.  Whenever  followed  by  n  or  ng  the  upstroke 
is  employed;  /*^  raititf,  /        nro»f/. 

Fifth.  When  r  is  the  final  ttroh-e  consonant  in  a  word, 
and  foUovcid  hy  a  vowd,  the  vp-ttrukc  is  to  be  used,  as  in 
the  words  'V  berry /  carry;  but  if  no  vwel  fol- 
lows, the  down-stroke  is  employed;  as  \j>oor,        ."^  car. 

Si.tth.  When  one  r  follows  another,  extept  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  word  when  preceded  by  a  vowel  (as  in 
x:rror,)  they  are  both  written  upward ;  aa  ,^-<'^^^\  rarity, 

y^  carriir. 
~  Stvftith.    When   followed   by  m,  the   down-stroke  ia 
always  used;  as  "V-l  roojH,   <c  charm. 

Reading  Exercise  VI. 

A  /.\  4\  X/  ,r  .^^  xt  .^ 
1/^   l^  VI  \^  V/1'  .^yf 

\/  /--  ^<  ..~y  y  w 

Writino  Exercise  VI. 

Repel,  retir,  redem,  rcdi,  ratitj,  ravaj,  pqrti,  dcrid,  ariv, 
urj,  §rt;   raf,  rak,  rikPti. 

Boro,  fori,  ivori,  tcori,  kai',  momori,  rotari,  turoli,  mer, 
demur,  admjr. 

Random,  reform,   rack,   rranimat,  adorij. 

Boroer,  borer,  barier,  interior,  naroer,  kuric.,  miror,  derer, 

Jeror,  karer. 

{Down-stroke  .R.]     Rem,  rjm,  remedi,  remmv. 


mtiiiitT »» ' 


-  •fff^mmsmtmJiimnmis.'iss.ii^itivi^tL  -m--  wmm'j  ^-j'*  '-  "■'  -"-'■^ 


.,-^ 


tmr* 


k«A*«i«****< 


40 


BIANUAIi   OP   I'llONOUUAl'llV. 


Uir.Krt  FOB  WUiTIX(J  L  AND  .?//.• 
31.  L  nnd  th  niny  l>e  written  upward  or  downward 
without  nny  change  of  form;  and  in  vocalizing,  or  read- 
ing, thr  direction  in  whirh  thy  v<re  mwii;  as  in  the  case 
of  the  up-8troke  r,  will  be  known_by  their  connection 
with  other  conHonant  Bignw;  as  (^lony,  C  V  Imvc,  <^ 
ihop,  J    »haicl. 

:52."'  The  following  rules  will  guide,  an  near  as  possi- 
ble, to  the  most  approved  use  of  I: 

Fint.  When  I  is  the  initial  letter  of  a  word,  and  fol- 
lowed by  ;.-,  (J.  or  «i,  the  uj.-stroke  /  is  employed;  as 

C~  lil-r,  f^  ?'"!/'"•-  i'^^^  ''■'»''■  ""'  '!'/  ''"*''* 
precedes,  the  down-stroke  is  uscd,asZl.  alike,  C~^  helm. 
When  other  consonants  follow  Ik;  Iff,  Im,  the  I  may  bo 
written  cither  upward  or  downward. 

Second.  Immediately  before  and  after  n  and  .-i-/,  the 
down-stroke  is  employed;  as  ^  h'iiV,  Qr- link.  If  a 
down -stroke  letter  is  to  follow  /  after  n,  the  upstroke  I 
must  be  employed ;  as   ^</' analogy. 

Third.  When  /  is  the  final  consonant  in  a  word,  and 
preceded  by  /,  v,  or  upward  r,  without  a  final  vowel  Jt 
is  written  downward;  as  K,  feel,  ^K  revile,  ^^ — ^ 
moral.     But  if  a  vowel  follows,  the  up-stroko  is  used ,  as 

JUrlh.  After  n  and  ny,  a  final  I  is  always  written 
downward,  even  though  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  C^  lonely, 
'•     — f  kingly. 

Fifth.  Final  I,  following  all  other  consonants  but/,  v, 
up  stroke  r,  n  and  ng,  is  written  uj^ard,  whether  a  vowel 
follows  or  not;  as   V   F"^  — -^     ^""^'  ""^  "'^"'^' 

•  The  sivnic  rpninrka  will  apply  to  these  rules  as  are  given  ia  a  note  on 
the  proucding  puge.  


aw**"* 


downward 
f»,  or  rcad- 
n  tho  case 
connection 
kave,  ^ 

r  as  poHsi- 

d,  and  fol- 
ploycd;  as 
if  a  vowel 
',"As  helm. 
I  I  may  bo 

nd  'ly,  tho    j 
I! Ilk.     If  a 
up-stroko  I 

I  word,  and 
lal  vowel,  it 

is  used ,  as 

ay:»  written 
is  (Si  loiieli/, 

nts  but/,  V, 
tlier  a  vowel 
s/      mail. 

ren  in  »  note  on 


«i 


^**^ 


ON    WniTINO    A    AND   ■Stf. 


47 


33.  >S'A  is  usually  writtca  downward;  bcibro  (,  however, 
and  after  /  and  v,  it  is  nearly  always  written  upward; 
as  J'^  shelf,  W  Ji»h,  /^\J  lavUh. 

Reading  Exercise  VII. 


f 


-d'  -^^ 


^  K  A  /I  -^   ^<^  ^ 

Writing  Kxeroise  VII. 

NoTK.— In  this  exorcinc  ttiiil  tho  next  one,  up-itroko  r  »nd  *k,  and 
down-stroke  I,  will  bo  indicated  by  italic  letters. 

Lck,  lik,   luk,  log,   lom,   losasi. 

Iaxw„  ?aDk,  /odN  Mi".  '''>«'.  '""0.  f c/iu ;— anu?,  onfi, 
kana/ ;— analitik,  analuji,  ciikirj ;— fi/,  M,  y\l,  unfaZio,  reve/, 
uiiva/. 

Bel,  nd,  ral,  rc?m,  karo/,  bare/,  peri?. 

Felo,  full,  vali,  rali,  rcali,  »ealiti ;— mcn?i,  fclioZi,  luvi^j/i ; 
— /i'i.  Al.  /"lo  ;— <^«/.   nav'/.  efi/ensi,  defi/ensi. 

/felij",   fottlij,   publij,   polij,   abolif,  rajli. 


I » » » I » ■^■^>T^^^< 


F************^'*^'"'^ 


-  t 


IMI^^IA*****^ 


M^^^M^^^Hta^ki**'^*^^**'^^''^'*!**^*^^*'^ 


48 


SIANL'AL,   OV    I'lIONOdllAPIIY. 


VOWKL  WORD  SKJNS. 
St.  Bj  a  word-tign  is  mcnnt  tlio  u«o  of  a  bIiikIo 
chnraotcr  of  tlic  nlplinbet  to  roproHont  nn  entire  word. 
Thia  Bchemo  is  roKtirted  to  that  llio  iicniuaii  may  attain 
greater  speed  in  writing;  and  thowe  wonU  arc  thoHcn 
thus  to  bo  represented  whidi  oeeiir  the  most  fre(|ucntly 
in  composition;  twenty-five  of  them  aitually  const  it  utinj,' 
onc-fourtli  of  any  given  chapter  or  discrxirse,  and  one 
hundred  of  them  amounting  to  ulniost  lialf.  The  signs 
are  so  chf)sen  as  to  suggest,  generally,  the  words  they 
represent.  Words  thus  represented  are  called  lign  worth, 
when  wc  wish  to  distinguish  them  from  other  words. 


the 


all 


two 


and,  an 
I 
already 


I 
"oh 


ought 


how 


who 


of 


I 


to 


or 


but 


on       should 


35.  Only  two  places,  the  first  and  last,  or  above  and 
on  the  line,  are  m.ed  in  writing  the  vowel  word-signs, 
because  without  u  consonant  it  would  be  impossible  to 
determine  between  a  first  and  second-place  position.  If 
the  word  to  be  represented  contains  a  first-place  vowel 
sound,  the  sign  is  written  above  the  line;  if  a  second  or 
third-place,  it  is  written  un  the  line.  No  confusi.-ji 
arises  from  bringing  sccond-placo  vowels  down  to  tW 
third  position,  since,  when  the  second-place  sijt*  is 
thus  transferred,  the  third-place  sign  is  not  useJ  as  a 
word-sign,  and  when  the  third  is  used  the  second  is  not. 


»^»w«^>»^^ 


»»» ^^m^^ 


of  a  Binglo 

pntiro  word. 

limy  nttiiin 

aro  chosen 

t  frc(|urntly 

coiiMtitutin^ 

'80,  und  one 

The  nigns 

words  tliey 

:1  Btyn-wonh, 

;r  words. 


how 


ht 


who 


n       should 

r  ahovo  and 
word-signs, 
uipossiblo  to 
position.  If 
-phice  vowel 
r  a  second  or 
i^o  confusion 
down  to  tW 
luce  siga  is 
ut  U8e«l  as  a 
econd  is  not. 


hA.>A*^«  I  I  «  «  «  fc^^A^^AA^^*«X 


MAHK8    or    PUNCTUATION. 


4'J 


'M\.  The  is  a  wovd-sij^n  that  often  follows  immediately 
after  most  of  the  others,  and  in  order  to  avoid  lifting.;  the 
pen  to  write  eiuh  separately,  it  is  joined  to  the  preeedinf^ 
sign  in  the  shape  of  a  light  tick;  thus,  ^  of  the^?'  on  the, 
>.  to  the 

Marks  op  Punctitation;  x  period,  J  colon,  J  in- 
I  terrogution,  t  wonder,  J  grief,  f  laughter,  { }  paren- 
theses; the  comma  and  semi-colon  may  bo  written  an  in 
common  manuscript. 

An  emphatic  word  or  sentence  is  indicated  by  a  waved 
lino  being  drawn  beneath  it;  thus,  '^;  if  it  is  desired  to 
indicate  that  a  word  should  commence  with  a  capital  let- 
ter, it  is  shown  by  two  parallel  lines  being  written  under 
it;  thus,  ^  + 


Beaoinq  £x£bcise  YIII. 


C 


^ 


•        |V  > 


i:.,*  I- 


l^  >  /I  X  ■  ^  ^ 


»  '^ 


r\r. 


1 1- 


N      I      X 


1 9www^^'v^'ww^^w9ww^imrwww^w'r9^wwwwn*^*99^%%n%^*9^*<t*f%v 


-^  -  -  -^  .^^1^^,,^^^^^^^,^^ 


_::_  ""'\ 


50 


MANUAL   OP   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Writinq  Exercise  VIII. 

"'wheTL  may  bo  united  with  a  preceding  word,  they  will  bo  connootod 
by  a  hyphen. 

Gariti  tariot  ?od;  hiaet  muq  roi,;  qeriJcD  no  il;  aperej  holli 
Invli  imun  us.  'fie'  crd  'utkI'  'de'  if.  A  Uvli  'and'  hapi,  but 
Xli  ^  V  o  nutiD.     'ac  hct  'ov-de'  fjr.     Go  'tu-de'  dor. 

"  He  ma  rit 'ol-de' tim.  La  it  'on-dc'/elf-  Gc.  W  "^l  J"«I? 
'and'  ri^de'  bel  Q  Jadi  porg  'and'  ka>HB  I«cr.  Ma  hqm.oni 
?0B  abjd  in  sr  Qurq. 

Fffllif  be!  'h^'  d^r  'hf,'  lavi/  mi  muni  'on'  so    vil    a  pol- 
isi?    '61'  'hot)'  MO  'dC  rit  '/ud'  dm    it. 

PvviKW  -426  ^  Which  are  the  letter*  that  may  bo  written  either  np- 

ReVIEW.— 1^"- ) ,      ,7  V  p-nuin  the  tin-stroko  r  as  compared  with  ch. 

m"" .  VrrdTl  tainSmo^'  ran  one'^.-on.onant  how  U  up-stroke  r 

(28.)  In.  T")"'* >"n\»'S    foQ  ^  wh»r«  »™  the  first  and  third  place  vowels 


i 


r 


ond,  ditto;  third;  fourth;  litin;  sixin;  s"""""''  ^"'- '  .(.V  ■"  (ho  first  rule 
when  the  strokes  sh,  r,  I  '"«"""«""?"»£*/  /sa'^^Mnder  what  oiroum" 
for  writing  ?;  the  »^°'«>j/wr'J^ien  upwi^  ?    (J^f)  What"     word-sign  ? 

What  is  the  wonl  Xr^"«   ceSh^L       TbTdiSrhLgs?    What  three 

irthW-"'ihrd«r7%0  What^s  theWico  m  writing  tke 
after  other  word-signs. 


^..inll ^^ 


MiN^Ww«'i^ww)'i  <'< 


lio  >ign- words 
in  quotation 
licatod  in  the 

bo  connootod 


upcret  holli 
I'  hapi,  'but' 
u-de'  dor. 

'tu'  iri  Jop 
[a  hqmioni 

vil   a  pol- 


tcn  either  np- 
iparcd  with  ch. 
is  up-3troke  r 
•A  place  vowels 
ing  r  ;  the  sec- 
3  it  determined 
1  the  first  rule 
r  what  oireum- 
is  -word-sign? 
1-word.  (35.) 
t?  The  third 
!?  What  three 
three  the  third 
"  What  three 
In  writing  the 


-'"'---- 


-------  ■--  — '*' 


#b»iii'i^»iii<|rf*«|«<i 


ItSHcn  if. 


THE  CmCLE  S  KSH  Z-OOM,  CON,  ING,  AND  MP— 
CONSONANT  WORD-SIGNS. 

The  fact  that  s  and  z  rep.^sent  sounds  of  very  fre- 
quent recurrence,  renders  it  necessary,  in  order  to 
secure  the  greatest  brevity  and  beauty  in  writing,  that 
they  be  fUrnished  with  an  additional  sign.  Indeed, 
each  subsequent  chapter  of  these  lessons  is  but  to 
introduce  some  more  abbreviated  method  of  writing; 
which,  while  it  seems  to  render  the  system  more  com- 
plex, adds  to  it  new  beauty  as  well  as  value. 

37.  The  second  forms  for  s  and  z  are,  a  small  circle, 
made  light  for  the  first,  and  thickened  on  one  side  for 
the  latter;  thus,  o  «,  o  z;  the  thickening  of  the  z-circle, 
however,  is  scarcely  ever  necessary,  as  the  sense  will 
nearly  always  indicate  whether  the  circle  should  be  «  or 
z.  Where  great  precisioa  is  requisite,  the  stroke  z 
should  be  used. 

The  circle  is  used  much  more  frequently  than  the 
stroke  s;  it  is  employed,  however,  only  in  connection 
with  stroke  consonants,  except  as  a  word-sign.  The 
table  on  the  following  page  will  assist  the  learner  in 
fixin"  in  his  mind  the  peculiar  connection  the  circle  has 
with  each  long  sign ;  it  will  also  be  of  service  for  refer- 
ence, in  writing  out  the  exercises  in  the  lesson. 


«»»W***W"»'*W*»»*«P"»^W^FW^'»*» 


(51> 


'.tiJB{-"-t'."!'iaW»W'Mi'*"-'"-'""''"  "■ '" 


Liiiijiimuiui 


1 1 1 1  I  -  - 1 *^>*j 


>A^^<»>A^*********' 


;*'■ 


52 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGR.U'ilY. 


TABLE  OF  THE  CIRCLE  S. 


Q_ysn 


f  Bt 
f  sd 

f  Bth 

C  stb 


/*  scb 


ss 


sz 


Q Sg 

^  ssh 
^  szh 


sr 


Q_>sng 


c/sr 

*^  810 


/sh 


6    ^  sm 

38.  The  stroke  ij  never  takes  an  initial  circle,  because 
not  needed ;  it  is  used  on  its  termination,  however.  The 
table  presents  the  circle  written  only  at  the  initial  end 
of  the  strokes,  whereas  it  may  be  written  at  cither  end, 
according  as  it  is  desired  to  read  before  or  after  the 
stroke;  thus,  \ops,  — «  ks,  "^  ws,  /ht..  ■  it  may 
also,  of  course,  be  written  between  two  r^-.i','><:!;i- ,  thus, 

\   Jest,  Vq_^/sn. 

39.  The  learner  must  observe  the  following  rules  in 
writing  the  circle: 

First.  On  all  the  straight  vertical  and  inclined  strokes 
it  is  written  on  the  right-hand  side,  both  beginning  and 

end.  , 

Second.  On  the  straight  horizontal  signs,  which  in- 
clude the  up-stroke  r,  since  it  is  nearer  horizontal  than 
vertical,  it  is  written  on  the  upper  side. 

Third.  It  is  written  on  the  inner  or  concave  side  of 
all  the  curved  signs.     Compare  the  foregoing  with  the 

table.  .    . 

Fourth.  When  it  comes  between  two  consonants  it  is 

turned  in  the  shortest  way;  thus,  J tsk,  ^chsn, 

msn. 


m. 


■■XJli. 


WH,Lj«f»1H  ' 


HMWi;jiti<ii  <Wiii"W 


.^dl^****  H««i 


J Sg 

^  ssh 


10 


■cle,  because 

rever.  The 
initial  end 
cither  end, 

ar  after  the 
>  "  it  may 

rivkc      thus, 

ing  rules  in 

lined  strokes 
ginning  and 

8,  which  in- 
rizontal  than 

leave  side  of 
ing  with  the 

isonants  it  is 


ON  WKITINa  THE  CIRCLE  5  AND   Z. 


Ill Ill I  I  1 1 1 1 «  « 

53 


40  In  vocalizing  words  in  which  the  circle  s  is  used, 
the  vowel-signs  are  to  be  placed  to  the  strokes  before 
which  or  after  which  they  are  heard,  without  any  refer- 
ence  to  the  circle.  As  rules  to  assist  the  learner  in 
reading  words  containing  the  circle  8,  the  following  ob- 
servations are  sufficiently  explicit:  ^ 

Tint  If  there  is  an  initial  circle,  it  is  aUayt  read 
first,  and  then  the  vowel  that  precec^es  the  stroke,  and 
lastly  the  stroke  itself,  as  f  «ca<,  a_^«acfc,^     imil. 

Second.  If  no  vowel  precedes  the  stroke,  the  circle, 
stroke,  and  following  vowel  are  read,  in  the  order 
named;  as  ^  spy,  f-stow,a_/    scale. 

Third  When  the  circle  terminates  a  word,  it  ismlways 
the  last'to  be  read;  as,  t  thi''^  1^  goes,  r\  looks, 
(T^  seems,  Y^  enjoys,  J<o  suppose;  when  written  between 
two  strokes,  its  relation  to  the  vowels  is  dways  evident, 
will  be  seen  in  examining  C  ^«'.       '  I    <'^"'^- 

Reading  Exeecise  IX. 

•f  \  f  r-  T  >^  /■  ^  -^  -<: 

c.  ^^/-  <-r  ^n-  c^x 


as 


J   °>\  .C  I 


J 


W^^'w**'"^' 


>w 


tw > 


*i»*»**^»^<^^»^'*^ 


pMWVUKiaMu*"    *hT>«i|tirfww 


mmmmn 


yk****4k****'i****Mi*<i** 


<i<i*****<''^^^j_Li,  'M^^!^ 


I " 


54 


MANUAL   OF   PUONOOBAPBY. 


Writino  Exkrcise  IX. 

Sip,  soRp,  Bap,  Bop,  set,  BJd,  sot,  sot,  sej,  suq,  sek,  sok,  sav, 
sid,  bit,  sez,  saj,  s^r,  ssr,  sol,  sol,  sam,  sum,  sin,  s<Dn,  8>d 
su{)k. 

SpL  Bta,  ski,  sla,  slo,  slj,  sno.  Pes.  daz,  qez,  jerz,  gas, 
fez,  vis.    ais,  doz,  Joz,  raz,  ris,  srz,  las,  mi»,  iii». 

Spek,  spok,  skem,  sfcr,  slep,  slak,  smok,  smel,  snal,  siDk. 
Besto,  besot,  task,  itself,  si^as,  spes.  i,  skiz,  sikst,  aflkjus, 
sedijus,  risk,  resit,  rezn,  deuiz,  solas,  Vnhuos,  <jozn,  mason. 

41.  There  are  four  cases  where  the  long  «  or  z  must 
always  be  employed :  First  when  it  is  the  only  stroke 
consonant  in  a  word;  as,  •)  ace,')  ease,  j-so.  Second, 
when  it  is  the  first  consonant  and  preceded  by  a  vowel ; 
as  .)_  a«fc,  Vv  fS'^«i^«-  '^^'""^^  ^^'^^  *''**  distinct 
vowel  sounds  come  between  the  8  and  followinj  conso- 
nant; as  in  the  word  t^  science.  Fourth,  when  s  or  2  is 
the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  followed  by  a  vowel; 
as  -O  -  '('««'  "^  J""^"^-  ^'^*^'  '^^^"  "  commences  a 
word;  as    K     zeal,   ^  Zion. 

42.  When  the  sound  of  s  or  2  is  heard  twice  in  the 
same"  syllable,  cither  of  two  forms  may  be  used,  ss,  )  or 
S  ss;  if  the  last  sound  is  that  of  z  the  circle  should  be 
made  first  and  the  stroke  be  written  heavy;  thus,    )  size. 

43.  When  the  indistinct  vowel  i  or  e  comes  between 
M  or  an  8  and  a  z,  or  between  zz,  in  the  middle  or  at  the 
end  of  a  word,  the  syllable  is^  represented  by  a  circle 
double  the  usual  size;  thus,  \oi>tcces,  ^^chooscs,  ,Vd 
suffices,  ^S>^nrccssary.  It  should  never  begin  a  word,  as 
in  system.  In  the  word  exercise,  it  is  allowable  to  put  the 
diphthong  /  in  the  double  circle,  thus, 


P»W»W»*W<W»»"***'"" 


,WH tl  I  I  I  I 


*A****^M*^ 


:,  Bok,  sav, 
1,  8«Dn,  Big 

z,  jerz,  gas, 

snal,  siDk. 
st,  aflkjus, 
sn,  mason. 

or  z  mast 
nly  stroke 
I.  Second, 
»y  a  vowel ; 
ro  distinct 
in"  conso- 
on  s  or  2  is 
<f  a.  vowel; 
immences  u 

vice  in  the 

ed,  ss,    j  or 

I  should  be 

hus,  ''')  size. 

les  between 

ie  or  at  the 

by  a  circle 
•'  pv 

chooses,  XO 
n  a  word,  as 
e  to  put  the 


r^i^w^^^ 


l^^riMMM 


I  II II  -  r  -  T  •^•-^^^^^^»**'^^**^*> 


I'RKKIXES    OOM    AND   GOX—AVFIX    IXO. 


55 


44.  The  circle  is  used  as  a  word-sign  for  w,  written 
a'uovc  the  line,  thus,  ° ;  and  for  as,  written  on  the  line, 
thus,  o;  with  the  dot  aspirate  prefixed  they  become 
'**  his,  .0  /ww. 

Readinq  Exeecibb  X. 

)-7  V  I,  I,  t,  '-T  J~1  i;,^ 


h^ 


? 


So^    U"^' 


WKixma  ExEECisE  X. 


Hsa,  isi,  aslcp,  cspijzal,  asinz,  sionz;— bizi,  swsi,  lazj. 
hci-saTekselensi,  obstiiiasi,  epilepsi,  sufiJensi;-z<Doloji,  zero, 
Kelusli,  zigzag. 

Ses,  ses,  sez,  sez,  sisorz,  sizra. 

Basis,  dosez,  Qfflzez,  klsez,  diskusez,  visez,  wnsez,  relesez, 
egzist,  pozesor. 

THE  PREFIXES  COM  AND  CON-tVL'E,  AFFIX  ISO. 

45.  For  the  sake  of  rendering  Phonography  as  brief 
as  possible,  a  few  arbitrary  signs  are  used,  for  the  repre- 
sentation of  prefixed  and  syllables  in  such   words   as 

;  would  be  inconvenient  to  write  out  in  full.  Thus,  a 
light  dot  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  expresses 

\  the  prefix  com  or  con;  as,  U  coudeniH,  2""  console; 
N^    compare. 

46.  A  similar  dot  placed  at  the  end  of  a  word  is 
used  to  '•-present  the  termination  ing,  when  a  separate 
syllable;  as,.|  aiding,  f^\^  living.  Ring,  thing,  bring, 
&c.,  are  written  with  the  stroke  ^.     It  is  often  more 


<»IIIHII 


:,, I II I 


.  -•rfjMntlilWWUK-.'J'** ''"''""""''''"'**" 


"-^' 


r 


:.l  m. 


M 


MANUAL   OF   I'lIONOdllAl'llY. 


convenient,  cspoeially  when  following  the  circle  «  or  up- 
stroke r,  to  write  the  iilphabetic  ng;  as  \r_^  i^iusing, 
C^  confcmng,  /^  ri*imj;  and  al'tcr  6,  W,  ^r,^ 
w  as,^^-^""'/"''"?.  "-^"^  «'■'■"«.■«//.  Ucncrally 
is  written  for  u-./s;  as  \__p  /"•'•«<;5,  ^.'  (\,  rryndng*.  A 
larjre  dot  may  be  used  when  more  convenient;  as  \do- 
huj»,  /\  hmdhuji. 

47.  jj//.._The  stroke  for  m  ib  ihe  only  one  that  ia 
not  given  in  the  alphabet  heavy  as  well  as  light;  and  in 
order  to  make  good  use  of  all  the  means  tho  alphabet 
affords,  this  stroke  written  lieavy  is  made  to  represent 
the  not  unfro<iuent  combinatio.i  of  m  with  j>,  citherat 
the  beginning,  middle,  or  end  of  a  word;  thus,  <r^ 
cnipirf,   i.^^  trmporanj,  f^^  lump. 

Writinq  Exercise  XI. 

Komit,  kompoz,  kompil,  komiiozia  kombat,  kontaminat, 
kontenjus,  konvinsi,),  Uouva.  konspir,  konspirasi,  konsolaton, 
konsuljip,  kous^rvatizm,  konjusncs;— paiD,  hopuj,  "lill,  etiD, 
goic,  beri\),  I'crii). 

Pump,  tompl,  temporal,  damp,  jumpiD,  rump,  tump,  sim- 
pliti,  simplisiti,  egzampl,  romp,  limp. 

COXSOXANT  WORD-STGNS. 
Ou  the  following  page  is  given  an  alphabetic  arrange- 
ment of  all  the  simple  consonant  word-signs.  Let  them 
be  copied  a  few  times  in  the  order  presented,  which  in 
conneotion  with  the  powers  of  the  letters,  will  enable 
the  mind  to  recollect  the  words  for  which  they  stand. 
The  circle  s  may  be  added  to  any  consonant  sign  for  the 
formation  of  plural  nouns,  or  the  third  person  singular, 
present  tense,  of  verbs;  thus, ^^  things,  /  advantages, 
D  comes,  (^    thinks. 


FV^F*****^"^^"^^^^^"'^'^'^ 


lo  «  or  up- 

bl,   hr,  th, 
orally 

iHcings.  A 

t;  as    I  do- 

»  ^ 

ono  that  is 
ht;  ami  in 
lu  alphabet 
0  rcprcKcnt 
p,  cither  ut 
thus,   C^ 


kontaminat, 

konsnlfttori, 

I),  "i'lli  Etip, 

tump,  sim- 


itic  arrange- 
.  Let  them 
ill.  which,  in 

will  enable 
1  they  stand. 

sign  for  the 

3on  singular, 

advantages. 


CONSONANT    WORIV-SU1N8. 


57     E 


it 
I  do 

(   think 
y   them 

mo,  my 
him,  may 
^     way 


CONHONAST  WOBD-SIONS. 
/  which  — 


f  kinf^dom 
\  oome 


) 


•li 


f  give-n 
/  advantage  —  |  together 

y  shall 

y  usual-ly 

^  ara 

(thing 
(language 

iiiiip"iit:iul-c« 
iriiproVD-ineiit 


SO 


was 


r 


fin 
I  no 
your 


48  In  the  above,  and  all  other  lists  of  word-s.gns, 
when  a  word  is  printed  with  a  hyphen,  as  gu-cn,  the  sign 
:  1  represent  either  the  whole  word,  or  only  so  much  as 
r.  eedo  •he  hyphen,  whieh  is,  by  itself,  another  word, 
;::  -  -  cither  ,/.«  or  gicau  Such  words  being 
nearly  alike  in  sound,  and  yet  different  pa.-ts  of  speeeh, 
nearly  an  .    .      ^^      ^^^  for  the  other, 

or  otherwise  incapai)ic  oi  ociut  lai^ 
cause  no  difficulty  to  the  reader. 

49  Inasmuch  «s  the  horizontal  strokes  do  not  fill 
Mie  space  ^hich  a  line  of  writing  occupies  they  are 
™ade  to  represent  two  words,  as  in  the  case  of  the  vowel 
word-stns  ono  above  the  lino  and  the  other  on  the 
U::  Jhose  written  above  the  line  containing  first-place 
vowels ;  those  on  the  lino,  second  or  third-;  Kco. 

lo  There  are  but  three  exceptions  to  his  rule  of 
po:ition,  (See  §1G,)  namely:  a.y  though  is  accented 
-owel  is  second-place,  is  written  above  the  line,  so  that 
if  left  unvocali'ed  it  will  not  be  confounded  with  «. 
L;  containing  a  first-place  vowel,  i-""-^ t  J  ^t 
to  keep  it  from  being  confounded  with  m«;  r,ven  is  writ 
ten  above,  to  keep  it  clear  of  ma»,  on  the  line. 


m 


). 
-.-* 


It 

'V, 


If 

I'll 


ri.: 


!! 


m. 


^*^*^^iitiXl^i<»A<MKXXi<>rfcai«i^Ji<i^^<i**^it^i*i*«>^A*0«fc*^*0^********^**< 


5b 


MANUAL    OF    rilUNOUUAPHY. 


Reading  Exekcise  XI. 
\^  .1  IT       K  I 

^^.  'V  o  \  ^^"  v^  /l  X   "   w 

O      V  -O        Vj»      -~^  !• 


O 


Q_LO 


.    //  \ 


X       N 


.1^ 


V 


.       ^   ^       o       .      .V|        V       ^^  ^  ^_ 


.     /^^     o      "/-V 


W«»^»*^^^i^^^i«^W*^I^^P^I'^^^^^ 


=J 


QE 


ililLtW 


EXERCISE    AND    llEVIEW. 


Weitinq  Exeucise  XII. 

'iz'  hollies. 

S'Xua.   -de-   .am  'bC.  put  'on-de'  't.^1^  ^^f  muq  3 

sT,,;!" tro   .'z'ezrsen  beaid  fob.    So/al  Uf  'givz'  n,uq 
hapines. 
(Isk  'no'  fasiUti  'in'  biznes  a&irz,  unZes  'if'bE-   nosesan. 

S'La^^e"  'h^ r^K  bckoz  reali  i/cscsan.  'az'  i.  supoz. 

BBV.KW.-(3T.)  What  -/be  second  tc.a.s  for  .^^^^^^^ 
,n»y  tho  circle  be  «ntenj    (iywn  ^"'^  ,^     straight  horixontaU  ? 

..lined  strokes  i»  it  turned  f    >^h.oh  B  uo  o  l*_^  ^^^  ^^^^^^^ ,, 

Which  Bide  of  Bll  the  cuncs?  J»"^;„*,J'y^^  i.^a?  If  there  be  an  initial 
( +(). )  Pow  are  s  rokes  hav.ng  an  ••«'«'»  ^"^"^f  ,„^i„g  •,  if  vowcU  both 
circle  and  preceding  vowo  .  whatjs  the  o  dor  "t  ro     j     ^^^^^  ^^^ 

^-X^fi^^'jK^atutg^^^ 

exceptions  1 


fw^^ 


^^v^**************"""*"*" 


■g^jBBWraianlBaftMl**    "•■ 


t^te**^k*^iWkAA**A< 


U1 

w 


IfSBOU    3. 


tl 

H 

n 


L... .. 


IMPROPER  DIPHTHONGS—  IF-nOOK  — TRIFHTHONQS. 

51.  The  improper  diphthongs  are  so  termed  because 
they  consist  of  the  union  of  consonants  with  vowels  ; 
namely,  w  and  1/  with  each  of  the  twelve  vowels  ; — the 
improper  triphthongs  are  the  union  of  w  with  the  diph- 
thongs i,  (T,  and  s.  The  fact  that  w  and  y  never  occur 
in  Knglish  except  before  vowels,  and  thus  occur  so 
freiiuently,  induced  the  inventor  ol"  Phonography  to 
represent  each  of  the  combined  sounds  by  a  single 
letter,  and  thus  save  time  and  space  for  the  writer. 


ir-SERIES. 


THE  DOT  oaoup. 

long.  Hliurt. 

I  we  I  wi 


wa 
wq, 


wo 
wa 


THB  DASH  GBOITP. 

lonir.  abort. 

»1  'I 

we  wo 


'1  wo 
J  wm 


wu 
wu 


52.  To  obtain  suitable  characters  for  the  representa- 
tioi  of  the  if-serics,  a  small  circle  is  divided  perpendicu- 
larly, thus  ^,',  the  first  or  left-hand  half  of  the  circle 
representing  the  union  of  w  with  the  first,  or  dot  series 
of  vowels;  and  like  them  it  is  made  heavy  for  the  long 
sounds;  as  '\  uwp,  '/  wngr,  ^  quam;  and  light 
for  the  short;  as  y^  %citch,  \/^  dwell,  <  waj. 


(130) 


I 


?HONGS. 

cd  bccauso 
th  vowels  ; 
vrela ; — the 
1  the  diph- 
lover  occur 
I  occur  80 
igrapby  to 
y  a  single 
D  writer. 

• 

lovr. 

short. 

I  wo 

'I  wu 

J  wu 
representa- 
•erpendicu- 
'  the  circle 

(lot  scries 
r  the  long 

and  light 
ag. 


*' 


I  I  1 1      -  •      *** 


IMl'HOI'KU    mi'imiONUH. 


(11 


53  The  ficoond  half  of  the  circle  rcprcHonts  the 
union  of  w  with  the  Bccond,  or  dash  8crie8  of  vowcK 
heavy  and  light;  as  'V-  ^cnna,  K^  wove,  V_  tcoo/,  / 
watch,  ^\^-^v<>rni,   ,|  voiihl 

54  The  firnt  place  sign  of  the  second  scries  of  diph- 
thongs, hoth  long  and  short,  when  followed  hy  k,  up- 
stroke r,  or  n,  is  written  in  connection  with  such  conso- 
nants; thu9,>-  ^oaW,   y   rcar,^u-an. 

55  These  signs  should  bo  written  as  small  as  they 
well  can  be  and  preserve  distinct  semi -circles;  and,  like 
the  proper  diphthongs,  they  must  always  be  written 
vertically,  and  not  change  with  the  different  inclinations 
of  the  consonants. 

REAmNQ  Exercise  XII. 

■1  /  _.  r  r  ^  n  ryzp 


Wbitinq  Exercise  XIII. 

Wek  wat.  ^vav,  wekncs,  bewal,  sw^,  aswaj,  wajez;— widt, 
weT wV  wiked,'«wel,  kwak,  ekwiti,  akwics,  relickw,;. 

Woker,  wok,  wmd,  wormli,  kwota,  kworum-.-woq.  wud, 
wojip,  skwolid,  swomp. 

^VorUk,  y/0Tt^r,  werti,  wokiostik. 


I ..-—■"  ■■'  "^ 


AAA*' 


MASl'AI,   Oil'    I'UONOiiKAl'lIV, 


B(5.  TUK  ir-HOOK.— Th.'  half  eircl.1,  li^ht,  is  joiiuMl  to 
tlic  tirHt  tMid  of  /,  up-stroko  r,  m,  und  «,  to  roprcttont  tUo 
Hiuiplo  ^oiiiul  of  w;  the  Htr..ke  to  whuh  it  iit  written^ in 
thou  voculizod  as  in ^  the  cano  of  the  »-circlo;  thus, '^ 
toail,  Y  icorrjf,     <i'^^-   uomanly,  "ii^  icanf. 

57.  The  Blphabctio  sit^n  muHt  alway»  bo  omployod 
when  w  is  the  only  conwonant  in  n  word,  (except  in  the 
word-sipn  *  we;)  and  in  words  that  connncnce  with  a 
vowel,  f..llowed  by  w;  and  aim)  when  w  itt  followed  by  «; 
thus,  S'tctfc,  "^L.  awake,    \'     Wetley. 

RxADiHO  Exercise  XIII. 


X 


Writing  Exercise  XIV. 

Walin,  wcl,  wilinli,  Wifeon,  kwel,  ekwali;-Wole8  wuli; 
-wcri,  bewiir,  wnr/*58.  weri8um;-kworel,  wurk,  wurkman- 
Jip,  wurjip,  wurtlcs,  wurdili. 

Wompum,  wuman/ik,  BkwEmiJne8;-windo,  kwenq,  twenti, 
twinj,  entNvin.  Wir,  kweri,  inkwir,  wel-bciD,  skwolor,  elo 
kwens,  ekwauimiti. 

W(i),  awi^r,  wizli. 
WrMTTTT 


d 

a 
i( 

M 
0 

I 

I 


ii 


11, 


t  jiiiiu'tl  to 
ri'Mcnt  tho 
written  in 
;  thuH,  "f 


employed 
cpt  in  tho 
ICO  with  a 
owed  by  «; 


iVoles,  wuli; 
k,  wurkman- 

wenc,  twenti, 
ikwoior,  elo- 


Tiiirirniosiiji 

lw» 


,!wii 


r,S      Tho  chanictorH  with  which  to  roprcHcnt  tho  com- 
,,i„,;i.,„    of   ..   with   tho    diphthouKS,   aro    obtu.ned  by 
dividing;  a  sniall  s.,uure  thus,    K;  the  U-tt-hand  nj^ht- 
„„.l,.,  in  tho  firnt  position,  roprosontinK  tho   tnphthon,' 
,n;  tho  othor.  in  tho  lirst  positi..n,  woi,  and  in  tho  third, 
«w;  thus,  ^^  .n/'S  ^  "I  'i«-''-     «"'-'«  '^''  "'troduction 
of  the   ,..hook  to  r,  /,  ««,  «,  tho  u-ow  character  .«  not 
needed  in  writing-  K:,„'lish.     Sometimes  •  may  bo  con- 
nected with  tho  followinK  consonant,  as  I  mde,  V  w^A"- 
5n      Bv  plac-inK'  the  aspirate  brlbre  these  improper 
diphihon^'s  and  triphtV      ps,  wo  -ot  the  proper  ropreson- 
taiion  of  the  tirBt  two  sounds  iu  such  w..    .b  a«  «7.m  , 
u7m-,,  M;   (the  .«  coming   before    tho    .  in   tho   old 
ortl^graphy  being   an   inversion  of  t..    .rdor   of  the 
elements  in  spoaking  tho  wo   '.'O  thus,     1  v:hcaf    - 

"''S     When  the  t.-hook  is  -sod,  the  aspirate  is  indi- 
cated by   making   the   hook  heavy;   thus,    .^     nheel, 

>V     nhcrrforc.     But  when  tho  alphabetic  w  is  em- 
^oy^  tho  aspirate  is  indicated  by  a  small  tick,  thus, 

'"S  whiz. 

Beading  Exebcibk  XIV. 


^\  tr  V^  C  X  ■'!  '^ 


64 


MANUAL    Oi-    PIIONOaRAPHY. 


Writing  Exercise  XV. 
Wivz,  kwiet,  widncs,  kwietnes,  kwcrt,  Irikww. 

o.nihwi;  n(D;.wiir;-hwelbaro,  hwclrit.    hwaler,    Invun/.ik.iht., 
hwelm;— hwous,  hw'in;— hwisker,  hwisler. 

IT  WORD-SIGNS. 


1 


i' 


^■k. 


we 


were 


■with 


what  would 

^  ^     _    ^  y C. 

why        'whii^  "^Th'cn  one"      where        wcii 

Gl.  These  word-signs,  like  the  simple  vowel-signs, 
are  to  be  written  above  or  on  the  line,  as  thtir  positions 
in  the  table  indicate. 

Reading  Exercise  XV. 


I 


^w****^*^^**"'''''"^ 


(•••^^•••"^^^•^^'"^''^ 


Iiwinizikalili, 


5 

would 

c_ 

■e         well 


vowel-signs, 
tir  positions 


7,.'.L 

^  r 


*;rC  Vs*tt*'«f*flSBf*^Sfewt 


LJ 


I  I  I  I      -  -  -  I  I  ■  --  IH«« 


EXERCISE   ON   IMPROPKU   DIPUTIIONOS. 


G5 


s     ^^ 


^^^^^-  ^  '^'^- 


^ij* 


^  .1  Z'  .   .^^;:^> 


Writing  Exercise  XVI. 

•siJ-.s  .urc;!;  ..n.? "iij' w.  .h.  6o»  •u„i., ». 

'hwi',  'mi'  sol,  dis  a^gwif.  .        ,       ,       ,       , 

kam  rcpoz  'tu'  'ol'. 


■  -j^ ^.,._^.CT^.- 


\M 


^i^h^^A^i^jfcAAA^fc^i^^ 


66 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


r-SEBIES. 


TUB  DOT  oaoup. 
long.  short. 

1  ye  1  yi 

U  ya  H  ye 

j  yq        -1  y* 


long, 


THE  UAaa  OROUF. 

short. 
,  ye  1  yo 

"j  yo         "1  y« 
„1  yo)  4  y^ 


62  To  obtain  characters  to  represent  the  ^^-scries  of 
improper  diphthongs,  the  small  circle  is  taken  and 
divided  horizontally,  thus, -^;  the  under  half  repre- 
sents the  dot  group  of  vowels,  and  is  made  heavy  for  the 
long  sounds;  as,  "^  year,  ^  i""'^'  1  ^  ''""'  """^  ^'^^ 
for  the  short;  as,  ^  yis,  (a  common  but  not  approved 

pronunciation  of  yes,)  T  F«,  ^<  f '»'  ,  ''^^'f 
half  represents  the  union  of  y  with  the  dash  group  of 
vowels,  heavy  and  light;  as,  ,/"  yaiol,  ^yola;  J  «««; 
•^  yon,  ^  y<mng;  y  never  occurs  before  U,  m  the 
English  language. 

63.  In  writing,  the  same  rules  must  be  observed  in 
regard  to  these  signs  as  with  the  lo-series.     (§o2.) 

64.  WOBD-SIGNS.— -"- V"  '  V «o,/ 

ye,       yet,     beyond,        you. 


Readinq  Exercise  XVI. 


h 


v_r:N  ~y"«ri 


•**■»**•****• 


^^v^iww««*<i>">^*''*^*^* 


PVWFW****"'"*'' 


r' 


»,«>«»^*..  HW*!*  a.B».>*.*.<.-«>»'«*»twMlto^: 


11'^ 


OUP. 

short. 

1  yo 

r\  yu 

^-scries  of 
taken  and 
half  repre- 
iavy  for  the 
o;  and  light 
it  approved 
the  upper 
sh  group  of 
yoke,  „)  vse; 
!  ui,  in  the 

observed  in 
(§52.) 


you. 


«iipV<M"P^V^^^F* 


r' 


EXERCISES  ON   IMPROPER  DIPHTHONGS. 


67 


Writing  Exercise  XVII. 

Vi-rli   ven    vcrlin,  yeloif,  yelpio,  yomanri,  Yokigani,  yuBif, 

""■'ac'"ya>t  'oV  M  komiiniti  'fud'  eq  Qmz  sum  hlJ^^^^}' 
•and'  folo  'if  kontinyiiali.     Pur  simp lisiti  '«>/>;; ';"«'J^:,.  ^'* 


Heading  Exercise  XVII. 


^w^r^^^f^^^^i 


SS»w5?5^^**»«^'»''**^ 


1 1  I  -  -  -  -  ■■■• '^^-;;-«^ 


I  II 1 »^ 


I  I  I  I  r  -  -  1  •     "J  I  n  «  »  «| 


68 


MANUAL   01     PHONOQRAPHY. 


Writino  Exercise  XVIII. 

■NT,,  York  «iz'  a  uopvulus  siti.  'Yffi'  'no'  'ha,'  i  am  'yet'  i 
.ma  Itos'tu'speHrr'  nam.  Humaniti  'fucT  Uv  'in'  pe« 
?^.'w  i  aUi;  'da  'Jud'  dwel  'tugeder'  'in;  'e  -de'^^ 
•in'  harmoni'and-  luv.  If  'ya.'  mak  falynrz  'm'  diiti,  jm 
•wil'TTv  'de'  laj  'oV  justis.'  'Se'  ny-ha  amjizc/.  lumsel 
•h  vil'  wokiB.  Ho  yes!  ho  yes!  scz  'de-  yui)  bcl-riDen  'cje 
yok 'ov-dC  oka  'iz>  hevi;  'if  gel.,  'hiz'  nek  d.s  worm  da.  In' 
daz  'oV  yor,  'hwen'  'we'  'v/qr'  yug. 

•We'  'vnxiiali'  'giV  'dem'  at  Tsrz  'tor'  slep,  twel v 'fer'  wurk, 
•anJ'  fo  'S  da  'ma'  'impra>v'  'in'  ..i  -wa'.  'Je'  bcrz  l  am 
tecin  'or'  dezjris  'oV  'impribvment';  da  sem  'lu'  'H^  'in'  dis 
S-^uvot'  I.'  wur*  da>\;i  at  'ol"i.'  wur*  da>.o  ;-.*-!; 
rtn  'wil'  olwaz  liv  'up'  'tu'  dis  maksim,  'so'  'Jal  da  liav  s  iK 
8^  •  n'  1  Sun,  'giV  'me'  'ya.r'  er,  'and'  'w.l'  tec,  yo)  'de' 
•wa"ov''  iif  Lei)t 'OV  daz  'iz'  'givn'  us  'for'  soja,'.  'and'  re- 
lijus  'impriJDvment'. 

u,.T.FW-f5l  ^  Explain  the   improper  diphthongs,  tlio  triphthongs. 
( 52  f  HowTrc  those  of  the".-serics  represented?    Which  ser.e.  o    vovvt  s 

consonants  inivy  the  signs  tor  «.(WBna  ^^^.^^^^^ 

noeraohie  representation  of  whr    (o».)  now  >■'"'""'  ""  »" 

sonanu?    (64.)  What  are  the  word-signs? 


„,lrt»J**li*<w«-a' 


..i^i-«,-#.-..ifc«6,^-«»««***«*=»'*»'^^ 


I  I  I  I  r ■ 


am  'yet'  i 
liv  'in'  pea 
'el-de'  ert 
dilti,  'y'cB' 
,07.  himself 
ifler.  'cte' 
m  da.     'In' 

r'fer'  wurk, 
c'  borz  i  am 
jk'  'in'  dis 
el'.  *  liop 
'hav'  8uk- 
c(i  'yco'  'de' 
>;.  'and'  rc- 


0  triphthongs, 
iries  of  vowtis, 
resent?  (63.) 
(64.)  To  whnti 
lut  I'iting  tha 

1  wjat  slrokea 
uh  .iJo  of  the 
a  the  improper 
ployeil?  (.iiS.) 
at  IB  the  jihi)- 
ook  aspirated? 

ich  halt  of  the 
What  are  the 
on  to  the  con- 


« 


temsJM^imt: 


XtBsan  6. 

INITUL  HOOKS -THE  i-HOOK  EXPLALNED. 

65.  A  peculiar  characteristic  of  I  and  r  is,  that  they 
readily  unite  with  preceding  conso.  ants— they  flow  back 
into  them,  as  it  were;  and  hence  their  classification  as 
liquids.  This  union,  though  a  kind  of  double  sound,  is 
formed  by  little  more  than  a  single  effort  of  the  voice 
Take,  for  illustration,  the  two  words  pint/  and  2)ray,  and 
observe  how  simultaneously  the  pi  and  pr  are  spoken; 
80  in  the  termination  of  the  words  title  and  acre;  m  the 
former  class  of  words  no  vowel  sound  comes  between  the 
two  consonants,  of  course;  in  the  latter  a  very  indistinct 
one  is  heard,  but  which  it  is  not  necessary  to  represent 
in  Phonography. 

G6.  The  most  philosophical  .ud  brief  way  of  repre- 
senting these  combinations  is  undoubtedly  by  some  dis- 
tinct and  uniform  modification  of  the  simple  letters. 
The  modification  adopted  for  the  I  is  that  of  a  hook 
written  thus : 

\p,\ph  \t,\(^'  ^/^/.  etc. 
67.  As  the  long  consonants  are  heard  first  in  the 
words,  consistency  would  seem  to  require  that  they  be 
written  first  and  the  hooks  afterward;  but  the  reverse  of 
this  is  the  case,  for  the  reason  that  hooks  on  the  termi- 
nation of  strokes  may  be  more  philosophically  and 
advantageously  employed  for  other  purposes;  and  be- 


■ilMWiia 


II *' 


MWIAL   OP    PUONOdHAPHY. 


70  __^__-_— — ^ 

almrK.i    tl,o  .noke  uad  the  h.ok  m««t  be  reRanL-d  as  an 

indiv-.  U.k-  ^.gn.  th.y  .h.,ab>   Klually  be  spoken  a«  Huch 

n    ;,l>an.  Tua  roJ.ng.  i.  «      .«  the  final  syllablcB  m 

.V  ^-  >,  I;  A-,  /.     A  distinction  is  thus  made  between 
p,  ;  ponounced  as  two  letter.,    and  ,,i  pronounced  as 

one  ;  the  former  sufrtro^-^  \  ',  ""^  ♦l^^  >»"«;  \  •       , 

r,;  To  assist  the  i-upil  in  reuu.ubering  these  hooks, 
it  my  bo  ol.erved.  thut  if  the  ?cft  hand  be  held  up, 
^i,h  the  ^Irst  fi..  .  .  be,U,  Ac  outline  of  n  mW  be  seen; 
arMi  by  turaing  the  hand  round  in  the  various  positions 
aslned  by  tlfe  letters,  p,  ^  ./.  /.  all  the  double  conso- 
nants of  the  pi  series  will  be  formed ;  thus, 


tl 


r 


,/./ 


hUZ 


^ 


TABI-E  OF  THE  /--HOOK. 


\bl 
(^vl 


f  tl 
fdl 

(  thl 


y  chi 


ki 


<^  '      I  struck  up. 
.  y  zhl ) 


69  The  hook  is  first  turned,  and  then  the  long  con- 
joint struck  in  the  usual  manner.  The  /-hook,  like 
Ts  cirdCt  made  on  the  vight-hand  side  of  the  vert. 
ea  ndinc'lined  straight  strokes  on  the  "PF-;^;  «/ 
the  straight  horizontals,  and  on  the  ms.de  of  the  curves. 

" fw^Sri^^ I      ' 


j,j»iaaMi«*«<*««rt!t»«»>«-*w*** 


r 


Ic  souiuls 
led  as  an 
•n  as  Huch 
Uables  in 
uid  not  as 
e  between 
ouuceJ  as 

ji»o  hooks, 

I  held  up, 

II  he  seen ; 
I  positions 
ihlc  conso- 


/./ 


c:^    kl 

c-gl 
ck  up. 

he  long  con- 
I  Z-hook,  like 
of  the  verti- 
pper  side  of 
>f  the  curves. 


W9 


KiDWStWJBwi^ 


es.     I 


70.  This  hook  to  the  strokes  «,  z,  down-stroke  r,  and 
ng,  is  not  needed,  since  for  si  and  zl,  the  circle  is  used 
with  more  advantage;  as,  ^  day,  ^  muscle;  and  the 
initial  hook  to  I,  up-Btroke  r,  m,  and  n,  is  more  useful 
as  w.    (§5G) 

71.  The  sh  and  zh  take  the  l-'txook  only  when  they 
are  combined  with  other  stroke  consonants,  and  then 
they  are  struck  upward;  thus,  ^^J  essential, 

72.  The  stroke  and  the  hook  being  considered  as  one 
gign,  are  vocalized  as  though  no  hook  were  used;  and  in 
writing,  if  a  vowel  precedes  a  hooked  stroke  it  is  written 
bcfore^it;  thus,  \  atfc,  V  evil;  and  if  the  vowel  fol- 
lows, it  must  be  placed  after;  thus,  X  ploy,  c-x.  close; 
or  a  vowel  may  be  written  both  before  and  after;  thus 
j;^    ahly,''[    idler,    J*         declare,  ,^^.^.^~.  exclaim. 

73.  In  some  combinations  of  consonants  it  is  difficult 
to  make  a  good  ?-hook,  but  it  can  generally  be  under- 


stood, as  in  the  word  /^  reply;  in  some  cases,  how- 
ever, it  is  more  convenient  to  write  the  long  I;  as  in 
— i^/^"  acccssihle. 

The  learner  must  remember  that  the  hook  I  is  to  be 
used  only  when  its  sound  follows  a  preceding  stroke 
consonant;  hence  Ip,  Id,  Ik,  &c.,  must  be  written  with 
the  stroke  I. 

Reading  Exercise  XVIII. 


^.  \  /^-  rr  v^'^   ^  - 


w 


(^w******"^""^^"^"'''''"""' 


_.1_.         '■■■ " 

no  MANUAL   OF   PIIONOOUAVIIY 


WniTiNO  Exercise  XIX. 
pifl  Wo  d-  tiL  Pi'^.  apU-  ci'iiJ.  ^"''>^*- .  ^i'''-  *i"'  ^"^i' 

VOCALlZISa  THE  i-HOOK. 
74      It  has  been   stated,   (SG5)  that  the   Z-hook   ia 
dosiened  to  be  used  ^hen  no  vowel  comes  bet^veen  the 
Bound   of  I  and  a  preceding   consonant,   or  when   the 
vowel  is  but  indistinctly  heard ;    as,  V    Jlec,  =__  <V<n/. 
K,apiM  ^ eagle.;  but  it  is  found  very  convenient 
occasbnully,  to  take  a  little  license  with   the  rule    and 
use  the  hook  even  where  a  vowel  sound  is  distinctly 
i    heard  between  it  and  the  stroke.     Tims,  m  writing  the 
xvord /uMioocZ,  it  is  much  easier  and  quickor  to  «iitc 
the  hook  /,  thu8,<|.    than  thus,  ^^7^1 

75      When  thit  is  done,  a  peculiar  scheme  of  vocali- 
zation is  resorted  to;  namely,  the  dot  vowels  are  indi- 
cated by  a  small  circle  placed  in  the  three  positions 
before  the  stroke  for  the  long,  and  after  lor  the  short 
vowels;  ast.  ddu.lce,  ^  till,  (T^  %"';  ^l»e«  ^ho  dash 
vowels  are"tVbe  read  between  the  stroke  and  the  hook, 
it  is  indicated  by  striking  the  dash  through  the  stroke  ; 
as  "^^  eulpahh;  or  when  its  place  is  at  the  hooked  end 
'itmay  Cb  written  just  before  the  hooked  stroke;  thus, 
\y^ tolcrahlv;   the    diphthongs,   when    necessary,   are 
ivr-men  as  the  stroke  vowels;  thus  y^ childuh,    (bee 

sno)  '^     ^  qualify- 

This  method  of  writing  is  used  to  a  very  limited 
extent;  and  the  learner  is  cautioned  against  using  it  for 
any  words  but  such  as  are  designated,  in  this  and  subse- 
quent lessons,  to  be  written  thus. 


1     ^^^ 


.»» » 1 1  ii^»» » I 


IP  * « 


jTiij, ,.■  I  i<rri  1 1  ■  I  ■"»" ' '  ■"' 


st.*vW-=oWi««  *««**••*- '*■•' 


iiq*tiM*J5«tMl»*>*«W*'***' 


.^sjwsBnirm'SJrtrtswsflfe-*^' 


till,  liupi,  j 

rcni(T)Val, 


Z-hook  ifl 
twecn  the 
when   the 

c (Vc.y, 

ouvcuiciit, 

rule,  and 

distinctly 

rriting  the 

>r  to  write 


>  of  vocali- 
s  are  indi- 
)  positions, 
:  the  short 
en  the  dush 
il  the  hook, 
the  stroke ; 
hooked  end 
Irokc;  thus, 
ccssary,    arc 
ilduh,    (Sec 

?ery  limited 
i  using  it  for 


.s  and  eubsc- 


WWJ  t  99¥  n  9W 


F*»»»» 


X-HOOK   AND  THE  CHICLE. 


RiADINa    EXBBCIBB    XIX. 

o       ■    . 


Wbitinq  Exercise  XX. 

Felsiti,  fmlskap,  felo-sitizonz,  fulnns,  fulminat.  vulgat. 
fiWikal,  voluptynuB.  konvulsiv  kolomal.  galvanik.  kalara- 
iti,  kolekt. 

£-HOOK  PKECEDED  BY  TUE  5-CIRCLB. 

76  The  »-circlc  is  prefixed  to  the  compound  conso- 
nant'signs,  as  well  as  to  the  simple.  It  is  first  written, 
and  the  pen  carried  round  so  as  to  form  the  hook  before 
making  the  long  sign;  thus,  X  '"PP^*"'  •/  »"''*''''  ^ 
civilize. 

77.  No  new  rules  are  required  for  vocalizing;  it 
needs  only  to  be  borne  in  mind  when  the  long  s  is  to  be 
used  (§41);  and  that  the  stroke  and  hook  are  considered 
as  one  sign,  and  if  the  vowel  is  heard  before  them  it  la 
written  before  them;  if  after,  it  is  written  afterward;  as 
in  the  previous  examples. 

78.  In  reading,  the  circle  is  read  first,  then  the 
vowel,  if  one  precedes  the  compound  stroke;  and  lastly 
the  compound  consonant,  with  its  following  vowel,  if 
there  be  one,  as  in  civilize  above. 

79.  WoBD-siQNS.— "^  call,  c—  difficuU-if,  \^  full, 
f  Hll  and  tell,  ^  value. 


7 


MANUAIi  OI-   PHONOMRAl'UY 


Reawinu  Exbroise  XX. 

■  •  ■-'_.  .V.  \,  •  V 


iwWiim-Mi'l'iti'*''"-*^"  --*««"" 


,a«ie,«^foJ6Bi.<BfA«»9iW»<6^^ 


KXKRCISK   ON   THE    i-HOOK,    AND    HEVIBW. 


-.1  q-  ^^^\r^'^-^ 


•  o     V 


Writing  Exeecise  XXI. 

Soil  sMl  sutlti,  siviliti,  siklz,  supines,  siviliziofwiv?, 
JA  iSful  iK,;ibl,  fiklncs,  fezibl,  advizubl.  di»pla.B. 
dmkloxoz. 

Note.  Tn  iho  fol'clng  cx.rcl.o,  ?  !.  ItalioUed  when  it  i.  to  b«  writ- 
ton  wiih  uii)  houk. 

ftiyiz  himself  k/osli  'tu'  'hiz'  bukn,  'he'  la./.oz  'ol'  k  a  n    tu-rt 
^ nw  W^W/'  fftmili  'or'  'hiz-  otiJaZ  superior.     'If  ';z'  Jam  u  . 
tf  'he-  'fui-  roko;okt  h«   'hiz'  famili  'h.jV  a  rit  'tu'  luk 
.  o  •  gumtin  vu«fu;  'in"him"tu'  rDi«  'doni'  'lor'  ter  'and' upzi- 
•H       irz'unrezniU./;  'for'  utiles -he'  '«iV  'up'  'hiz'  evii  'wa 

'f/'  di  pTczin  'tu-  'hiz-  ktas-feloz,  'tu-  himself,  'and'  tu'  'ol' 
neu'  Si.  'it'  'iz'  ofu/;  'for'  id?  habits  'cvr-  apt  '  u'  bskurn 
f„  «  'in  '  ^e'  cvi;  'wuu'  "elwaz  misqit  seka  'for'  \i\l  ya>«  'tu' 
^r-*'  "Sul-  'de'  Uolar  'h.r.'  fatfu/i'apaz  Wnj^^'f /^.Vj'  ri''^' 
■wil'oWiJ 'him'  'ho)'  teQcz  'him',  'and'  p/ez  'ol'  m^  'ha,'  'no 

'him'. 

D„.„,w_/n'i  >  ExDlain  the  peculiar  oharactor  of  i  and  r.  (B8.) 
Wh^t  frho"^.nt'rL,tcd  form  of  rop^rSontingthcm?  (67.)  H.w  are  Btrouos 
What  19  tno  o()ui™.i,«u  •". '/««  \  Unw  m»v  vou  rcinombor  the  po- 

with  I  »°\ '•-h'><''?V°^6rrOn  Uch"  iS;  of  t^^^^  and  inclined 

siti(.n..f  'h»h»f^,.f«.V™,kwri«ent    Which  aide  of  tho  straight  h..ri- 
Btraight  ''JJl"*'' *\ '^"ir'^r^^^^^^  which  of  thostroL.  is  the 

.ontaU?    Whicf  .We°\lU^^^  %Ja^  ^h  and  .A  t>.ke  the  /-hook? 

rV'jStw^relrok'S.  vocalised?    (74  )  What  i,  »aid  ab.^«t  a 

--ir?hVdr::?eXi^-trx'rh^^ 

^^cr  rpord'Hrtres?"  (IS  WhaVarl  the  ^hooU  wonl-,ign.7 


www** 


r»TT»»<r»w»w*<^ 


^••"W  I 


".^^flMTf'"''^ 


lesson  7. 

THE  K-HOOK- DOUBLE  CURVE  FOB   TOR. 
80      If  the  right  hand  bo  hold   v-p-  ^^^V,!''/'!' 


pr 


ehr 


krC 


TABLE  or  THE  B-HOOK. 


y  cbr  --  tr 

-^  *  '  I  struck  down. 
y  zhr) 


mr 


nr 


81     The  r-hook  is  written  on  the  left-hand  side  of 
jUc'al  and  inclined  s-ight  s.ok.    -^^  -  ^h 
under  side  of  the  straight  honzontels-just  the 
of  the  Z-hook. 


.4j|W«l!B--^S«** 


irtByi«6«iw<a»i*»a>«>«i«»***='"**" 


THE  «-H<»<»K. 


77 


8"      It  will  bo  Bcen  from  the  tul.lo  that  /,  r,  th,  and  th 
lake""  the   r-h«ok  by   ansuming  inverted  p.;«il.onH   and 
occupyinK  the  placcH  of  r,  w,  »,  and  z;  thus,     >  Jnr,   /^ 
r     ^  tkro,J,  •)   cl,h.r,  which  they  can  do  wUhou 
am bi-M  ity.  nine;  these  letter*  never  reee  ve  an   uut.al 
;i"    In  thi«  there  i»  an  apparent  dinor  er.  but  when 
properly   viewed,  they  arc  in  strict  analogy  w.th   tlu3 
Htraighi  consonants.     If  the  character  \  r[  ^«  ">*  «" 
in  a  piece  of  paper  or  card,  and  then  turned  over,  ^  pr 
L  produced;  in  the  same  way  V  A  if  cut  .n  card,  and 
reversed,  gives     \  /»•• 

83  To  indicate  the  r-hook  on  m  and  n  the  strokes 
are  made  heavy,  which  distinguishes  them  from  .nu  .cu; 
thus  ^  homr,  \  dinner,  ^^- grammar;  and  s 
nSerX;.  nor  ./Take  any  hook,  it  will  not  lead  to 
any  confusion. 

Lmetimes  this  hook,  like  the  /-hook,  has  to  be  made 
rather  indistinctly,  a.  [^  degree,  )n»crJ>e.  After 
J  the  downward  r  is  used  instead  of  the  hook,  as  Ju^ 

shaker.  ^         i      t  i,     i- 

84     The  remarks  in  regard  to  vocalizing  the  Z-hook 

strokes  apply  in  every  particular  to  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
It  should  especially  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  hookca 
tr  kcB  are  regarded  as  one  letter,  and  spoken  as  the  ast 
yl  able  in  rea^.,  let.r,  acre,  &e.,  and  not  as  p,  r;  , 
Tr  &c  ;  and  that  as  a  general  thing  the  hook  is  only 
Id  wh;n  no  distinct  vowel  sound  comes  between  an_ 
other  consonant  and  a  following  r;  as  in  \  pray,  . 
crew,  -]  vtkr,  ^.'J  ^"■'""•«-      . 

85     When  U  is  P^  'ceded  by  'j  (u:a^o),  they  may 
be  united;  as  in  1   «;afcr,  and  allits  compounds. 


:,«!«**<»■ 


78 


lit I *  *,' 


MANUAL   OP   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Reading  Exercise  XXI. 

Writing  Exercise  XXII. 

Dri,  tre,  dra,  krj,,  gro,  aker,  odor,  uper,  apqz,  Opril,  apr<i>v, 
drcrn,  brii,  frek,  Frida,  mcttver,  klover  tro,  gader,  erajur, 
pluraer,  murder,  maner,  onorabl,  overluk,  everihw^r,  knm- 
(nal,  purqasez,  transpoz,  trembl,  bruder,  jurni,  jurnal,  framer, 
wunderful.     Gekor,  joker. 

86.  A  limited  license  is  taken  with  the  above  rule, 
(§84)  as  in  the  ease  of  the  ?-hook,  and  the  r-hook  is  some- 
times used  when  a  distinct  vowel  sound  comes  between  it 
and  the  previous  consonant;  in  which  case  the  same  pecu- 
liar scheme  of  vocalization  is  employed ;  thus,^  *>^  Dmr- 
«>,    ^^^  !>«•«?«,  ^f^  cowm,  ^'^~    reqxdre,    \VO*tu,re. 

Beading  Exercise  XXII. 

NT  .U. -^  "^ -^  ^  ^  ]° 


,w 


-^ 


vt^ 


,^^»v»»w«f5*^^^*»^"*^'" 


»*»W«P*^F^'^^'*^*^'^^ 


.  BralKSisB*! 


THE    iJ-HOOK. 


Writing  Exercise  XXIII. 

Gerful,  k^rles.  -^-\--f^^'^^tt^^ltJ& 
Jqrper.  torni,  perv^rs,  korsli,  moraiui,  neru,  nur  j, 

preliminari,  fetyq,r. 

THE  «-HOOK  PRECEDED  BY  THE  S-CIRCLB. 
87      The  «-circle  precedes  the  r-hook  in  r^'^^J^^ 
same  manner  as  it  does  the  i-hook;  thus,  it  m,gh    be 

Written   «^\  W,  ^  «*'•'  ^'^^  ""^'^  *^'  "T   *   V 
leroccupief  the  r-hook  side  of  the  straight  strokes 

Tantage  I  taken  of  the  circumstance,  s.nce  a  e.ch 
.ore  easily  written  than  a  .rcl^d  a  h.J.  to  .nte 
simply  the  circle    thus,  \' itray,  .  '     i 

r  luccor,  7  «e^er.  'fiut  with  the  curves  th.s  con- 
^etion  ca'nnC  be'  made,  since  the  simple  --!«  -- 
pies  the  place;  hence  the  circle  and  hook  mus^  both  be 

-.f^n-  thus  T\  suffer,  «v  summer,  ^  sinner. 
^^8     'whTn  treslcle  and  ,-hook  come  between  t.o 
straight  consonants,  it  is  often  more  convement  to  wpto 
the  hook.in  addition  to  the  circle  than  not,  as  m    >^ 

^T'^rmrrules  are  to  be  observed  in  vocalizing 
and Ld'nl/Lt  were  given  for  the  .hook  preceded  by 
the  8-circle,  (§77,  §78.) 


BEADiNa  Exercise  XXIII. 


I  -     I  [ ^*:f^ 


80 


MANUAL   OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Writing  Exercise  XXIV. 
Spri.  stra,  strik,  strem,  skrap,  skTOpl,  skrib,  ^trept,  strng. 
stranj,  stroBger,  super,  saber,  supremasi,  sekres,,  siler,  suferiB, 
sever,  simer,  sfflncr. 

THE  DOUBLE  CURVE  FOR  THR. 
90.  When  a  curved  stroke  is  repeated,  an  angle  is 
made  between  the  two;  thus,  ^^/,v_--^«»,  which 
leaves  at  liberty,  to  be  used  for  some  other  purpose,  the 
double-kngth  strokes.  A  somewhat  arbitrary  though 
convenient  use,  is  made  of  them  thus:  Doubling  he 
length  of  a  curved  stroke,  adds  the  syllable  ther  to  the 

single  strokes;  thus,  V-  /«'''«^'  ^~r^  ""''T'  T 
forms  are  used  chiefly  as  word-signs  for  /atlicr,  vvother, 
neither  (above  the  line,)  another,  ratlier,  further. 

91._^.H00K  WORD-SIGNS. 
N  principle-al        ^  from  J  sure 

N  re-member         ^  every  ^ ^t'^Z^^rl. 

]    truth  )   ttrce  ^^imore 

■^~  care  )   *^ere,  their  <:;-^  nor,  near 

BxADiNQ  Exercise  XXIV. 


,.J" 


;» Ill  II  ■  w 


F******"**^^^^ 


^9 w^^^^f^^^f^^^ 


S«« 


•^•^ 


Ot,  strngl, 
)r,  suf  eriu, 


angle  is 
m,  which 


pose, 


the 


r,  though 
bling  the 
her  to  the 
c  These 
r,  niother, 
er. 


asure 

.,  re-mark 

ire 

r,  near 


********* 


^^^^^i^^^AA****** 


EXERCISE   ON   THE   if-HOOK. 


^^     *V    S^    '^     « 

•-p -  >-^-^') /^,'\_p .^v^  ^ ' ■ 

^^.  (,r.x_-u(-^  'J- ' 


182 


MANUAL  OF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


N0T..-In  the  foUowing  exercise  r  is  italicized  when  .C  is  to  be  written 
with  the  hoolt. 

Writing  Exercise  XXV. 

SERIUSHES  AND  SC>BM8TI.-NuMd  -^^^^^^ 
but  wid  seriu^nes  and  soMe  u    ;\  °^«;j^;'"°t'^  f,,  but  'rader- 
tm  'valyu'  ov  W^  and  ^1;^  «  "'^J' ?f  V^  striks^s  az  so  stmnj 
on  hwot  iz  'imrertant.'     ^"^'Oi  P"X f'tri  Iz    and  triElio  wid 

^^^  sSSerand  wud  ^X^::^^^^ 
Sup?idwidst.oz  tu  jjawid   he,ut.  ^^  ^ 

awa,  until  ^^^ P^^ '''J^'^/'su'         He  striks  wid  streiifi  and 

^:j^,;z:^^oZ^t^^^,  stj  uizhopsintud. 

be  sober. 

On  which  side  of  the  stm.gh^^^^^^^^  .       <;,,  <\,  tulce  the 

strokes  do  not  take  the  t-''""^'  .,  *°  V^.  £,^  /uV  and  ,i  take  th.s 
r-Uook?    Explain  this  irregularity.     ^»^.;   .?'"'.        unamo  the  strokes 

Lok?  (84.)  Wl'"U%«'Vvh'att  thT  ic  nf;  K»d  to  'ho  use  of  the 
of  the  r-hook?  (86.)  What  is  ^"°  "fj"',  '  .(..i.^n.  (87.)  How  is  the 
r'hook?    Explain  t^o  peci.l.ar  scheme  of  v~ah^ 

.-circle  prefixed  to  the  f  ™'f  ,fjVc„U  ,f  o^  («!•)  ^''■ 


JUiilSSiiFi^^T** "^ 


;.  .«Sr#SS«S^#'*'P^' 


..*«.«..,-.«»*t,-te«*««^«ae»*sfe^«*^^ 


to  be  written 


z  tui  be  had 
:s  tu  wa  de 
,  but  'lader' 
az  so  stranj 
[  tr-itliD  wid 
'ler,  hflo  hata 
ran  sm»era. 
v  Uf  tu  flo 
strip  ov  Ijlf. 
i  strei)D  a"d 
tops  iutu  de 

intu  sa.  es, 
it  iz  sk^rsli 
no   hwen  tu 


r-hook?  (81.) 
I?  (82.)  What 
h,  th,  tiike  the 
ad  11  take  this 
aino  the  strokes 

the  use  of  the 
17.)  How  ii  the 
e curves?  (W.) 
es?  (.01.)  Vcs- 
iree. 


M* ' 


■iiwi' WMyiK"*^W*W 


lesBcn  8» 


TERMINAL  HOOKS. 

92      Since  the  hooked  strokes,  although  representing 
twfelem  ntary  sounds,  are  written  with  nearly  the  sana 
frcility  as  the  simple  strokes,  the  method  ot  hooking 
appl  ed  to  the  termination  of  the  consonant  signs  as  weh 
Ttothe  beginning.     The  ^osi^^^'r.l,nr,'^^^^^^ 
the  two  terminal  hooks  can  subserve,  are  to  represen 
h     ve  y  frequent  sound  of  n,  and  the  common  final 
fyilalle'^u'heard   in  .uch  words   as  naUon,  passion, 
physician,  &c. 


TABLE  OF  THE  JV-HOOK. 
1  tn 
Jdn 
(^thn 
(^thn 


,kn 


■^rn/ 


^chn 
)  sn 

nn  >j  wn  T  ^^ 

93  On  the  straight  strokes  the  n-hook  is  written  on 
the  left-hand  side  of  the  vertical  and  inclined,  and  on 
the  under  side  of  the  horizontal  strokes,  embracing  of 

the   up-stroke  r;    while   on   the   curves   it  is    [| 

*' "' im 


mn 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOQBAPHY. 


84 

written  on  the  inner  or  concave  Bide,  whether  to  the  left 
or  right;  as  illustrated  in  the  preceding  table. 

94  The  n-hook  might  be  written  on  .11  the  strokes; 
but  on  the  ng  it  would  seldom,  if  ever,  be  of  any  advan- 
tage.     The  «)-hook  to  the  n  answers  every  purpose  that   | 
an  n-hook  to  the  w  would. 

95  Of  the  two  forms  for  In,  shn,  the  down-stroke  sh 
and  the  up-stroke  I  are  generally  used,  the  others  being 
employed  only  in  connection  with  other  strokes  when 
the  first  m3ntioned  would  be  unhandily  written 

96  The  n-hook  is  always  the  last  thing,  belonging 
to  a  stroke,  to  be  read;  thus,  \  pain,  V^.  ^'«>  ^  "'""^ 
C  thine^  y^  run,  /C"  Une.  H  no  distinct  vowel  sound 
is  hoard  between  the  stroke  and  the  liook,  no  vowel  sign 

written;  as,  .V^  leaven,    s)  ocean;  where  a  third  plac 
vowel  sound  is  heard,  the  sign  must  be  phced  on  the 
outside  of  the  hook;  thus,  ^  m««,  C.  ''f".  "^  ^'""^^ 
thus  the  vocalization  is  the  same  as  in  other  compound 

'^'gi'^'strokes  having  an  initial  circle  or  hook,  of  any 
kind,  may  also  have  a  final  hook  or  circle;  as  \flan, 

\  strain.  ^   .  „„,,i 

^  98  When  tLe  n  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word, 
followed  by  a  vowel,  it  must  be  written  at  length ;  as 
.-^^  money,  /^  China. 

Rkading  Exercise  XXV. 


x  i„  y  ' 


•^> 


^ya-</>/'^-^^l    V^T-^--' 


^1/ 


^i>|i  ■!■>>* 


»»  » I  I  I  i  »» 


.r#V,?55^'*«* 


.^vy,».is*«!p-,a»i»f3S*Sa»B*«««i*' 


1:  .'; 


tiM^ *% 


to  the  left 

le  strokes ; 
my  advan- 
irpose  that 

n- stroke  sh 
thers  being    \ 
•okes  when 
en. 

,  belonging 
ine,  C  thin, 
rowel  sound 
I  vowel  sign 
,  third  place 
ced  on  the 
I,  — 3  coon; 
r  compound 

look,  of  any 
;  as  \.  P'^"'*' 

in   a  word, 
t  length ;  as 


THE  A-HOOK. 


85 


Wbitinq  Exercise  XXVI. 

Pan,  pin,  ba.n,  ton,  disn,  qan,  jern,  kan,  g°'l;^^i"'  ;"^^^"' 
Tin  ofan  rail,  run,  Ion,  Un,  min,  mmn,  non,  nsi ,— opn, 
ftpn  S'enJakn,  ergan,'erfan,  enlivn,  morn,  wernifl.  fol", 
ffinf  roman,  wuma^n.  Br«n.  dran,  re«tran,  pqrdn,  burdn, 
refran,  regan,  enj^n,  abstan. 

THE  JV-HOOK  FOLLOWED  BY  A 
99.  When  «  follows  after  n,  without  an  intervening 
vowel,  the  circle  may  be  turned  on  the  hook,  as  in  the 
case  of  «  preceding  the  «-hook;  thus,  \^  fam, --^mom, 
-O-  .nachm':^,  /I  refrah^.  With  the  straight  strokes 
however,  it  is  unnecessary  to  make  both  the  hook  and 
circle  thus  \  pm.  since  the  circle  itself  embraces  the 
hook 'and  will  not  be  mistaken  for  «,  which  is  always 
wrtten  on  the  other  side  of  the  stroke.  Hence  we 
write  ^  iJettJ,  j-  dunce,  </  cJMtm,  ..^  mourm,  \_^ 

begins.  .  .     i.i  j 

100.  The  double  circle  for  mes  is  conveniently  usert 
on  the  straight  strokes,  for  such  words  as  ,j-  tenses,  ^ 
chances,  i^  cmmquences  ■  but  a.  a  double  circle  cannot 
well  be  formed  on  the  hook  attached  to  a  curve,  a  stroke 
n  must  be  used  in  such  words  as  V^  Jinunces,  V^^ 
evinces. 

Reading  Exebcisb  XXVI. 


;■  ^y  7v<«  l>^  r  VLT  "w  "^v^ 


x^.  U-li-i'-f-^n^^ 


IT  »  ■  I  I  rvw^^m 


»*•••••••'•' 


■  -  ■  "' 


*'  IB-t 


i  St.  ' 


MANKAL    or    PHON0GUAIM1Y-. 


WRITtNa    EXKRCISE    XXVII. 

Pan.,  ben.,  penz.  ton.,  qan.    g«;'^.^-rkoS-/S 
ortanz,  balans,  reman.    Jerman.ponH'm  ,^^k^^^^ 

sez,  pronsnsez,  advanscz,  konjonsez. 


(men 
(man 


101.     iV-HOOK  WOBD-SIQNS. 

\  upon  —^  can 

\tcon  V^  phonography  (man 

J    done  (^  than,  then        ^(opinion 

/general-ly  ,/- ^^"'^^  ^^"'"" 

Reading  Exercise  XXVII. 

o.  y  ^'>  ^  -^.  ^  .•"^. . 
^^  ^  ^  _  ^  '  »  u  •  "^ 

C.  .1    C    l^  X 


»lt.. 


,sessftHi^''i^'^^^^^^^^'-''^' 


EXEIlOlfiV.   ON   TUB   .V-UOOIC. 


87 


.^,  '2  „  >. . .  '^  "^  .  -  "I  ^  - 


WEIT7NG    EXEKCISE    XXVIII. 

KURaJ.-Tro.  kumj  ha.  its  orijin  in  y^rtyn.  Animal  fe^- 
lesnea  puta  on  «c  semblans  ov  kura.i,  and  iz  ofn  takn  ler  't,  bl 
nTrtovVenamun  'msu';  bat  de  Waai  ov  d.s  'opinyon*  haz 
^n'  Jon  bpjrcral-  eksperiens,  !er  pra)den8  iz  ekwah  esenjal 
tu  it. 

T,i  aten  trti>  kurai  enter  'cpon'  nutio  rajli,  egzamm  wel 
h>v^UrrfiirVlitd  br,,  and 'form  ya,r  'opinyon'  befot  ya> 
K  t  'kan'  ymdc/fer.  if  yfl>  hav  gon  tu  wurk  'npon' 
'pH  "sipl'and  hav  dun  el  ym  'kan>  da>'i  er  hwj  Jud  vco  fel  a 
Crn  for  konsekwen,«,  hwiq  l»av  'bi,»'  elred.  wad  H  yo,? 

Tn  hnmbl  rcljana  'upon'  de  asistans  ov  Hevn,  go  opnli  and 
^vid  konfidens  S  finif  ymv  v^mz.  Si*  sin.pl  fafi  'M,  de 
"dtns  ov  qMren  'upon' a  divj.  F^der.  wil  kari  yo.  safli  tra>. 

'Rpmember'  dia  Hrfflt',  h^ever,  'dj^r'  iz  'jflnerah-  'mor'  tra 
kumifoTu  a  P^iv  vezisuns  tu  de  .kom  and  sucrz  ov  -men', 
•da™  fiaz  <bin'  sen  in  eni  bodili  defers  hwotever. 

Tra.  kurai  iz  bi  no  menz  savaj  violens,  ner  a  fmlhardi  in- 
aensIbiUti  tu  daujer;  ner  a  hedstrop  rajnes  tu  run  sudenl.  u^^ 

;;— -TTTrrnTT'i    ■ —  "^  ■ 


^y^if  nwy^rr^wri^^'^i^^ 


rezii;  but  it  it.  a  »ere»i,  f?rra  act(jnuuhu  j 

but  never  dc  fersnes  ov  a  t;gor. 


B«v,KW.-.-(920  What  do  't^ilL.Kc'r'y^'wS^'^"  j'JllJ 
Bide  of  tho  .truiiaht  .trokcj  ' V*"  u^hrf  Tr,  k  n  .  writlonJ  (95.)  Which 
curve.?  (94.)  fin  whiit  »t''*;^j' ^  u«o"v(  Ort/l  How  are  the  «-houk 
form,  of  t\o  i»  a;"»,«i\T  ^H"  -  mu  t  th«  «troK.  «  b.  cmpl>.yo.n 
alToke.  vocaluo'lf  (98.)  1"  "l" ,/'  '  h,.ok  on  the  curves?  How  oil  tho 
r«9  )  How  i.  tho  circle  written  to  tho  »-hooK  on  ine  lur  ^^^^ 

itroke.. 


I! 


«,.ei»-«iK*^'-»*  «^a**<-«>a««..2s«««*SB4^ 


asaar" 


J)  pTjcr  ov 
ov  u  'limn' 


)  On  which 
I  nido  iif  the 
[95.)  Which 
3  thu  ;i-hmik 
itf  cinphiycin 

How  oil  iho 
ritlon  in  the 
wjlho curved 


1 1 1  -  -  -  -  "^1*::^^^^ 


leBBon  9. 


su^ 


VOWEL  CONTRACTIONS -DISSYLLABIC 
DIPUTU0NG3. 


ly.,,  ok  is  somewhat  arbitrary ;  that  is,  it 

la  not  'onotic,  in  that  it  is  but  one  sign  used 

to  represent  three  sounds  ;  but  of  course  the  means  ej^ist 
in  the  alphabet  for  writing  out  the  syllable  m  full,  it 

preferred. 

TABLE  OF  THE  SHN-HOOK. 

[  t-shn         /'ch-shn 


\j  b-shn 

O  f-shn 
Vi  v-shn 


/  j-shn 
U  B-shn 
*)  z-shn 
P  1-shn  C 
ng-shn       iT    h  shn 


3  k-shn 

3  g-shn 

cJ  sh-shn 
(J  zh-shn 


[  d-shn 

C  tli-shn 

(j  th-shn 

0  r-bhn  / 

/O  m-shn        v^  n-shn 

103     On  the  straight  strokes,  the  .Anhook  is  made 

on  the  opposite  side  from  the  n-hook;  and  on  the  curves 

it  is  made  in  'he  position  of  the  «-hook,  but  double  .ts 

size,  as  illustrated  (bove.  „,.».,.      .  4V„  *«, 

104.    The  most  general  use  of  this  hook  is  at  the  ter- 

niination  of  words;  a«  ^\»  "^^"'>'C  T^^^  Jn  it 
vowel  follows  the  stroke  on  which  the  hook  is  written,  it 
is  read  between  the  stroke  and  the  hook;  as  V^  evanm, 
yP  relation,  -b?  adi/raHon,  X'  comid^ratim. 


-^i- 


90 


MANUAIi   OF    1MI0>I<HIUA1>UY. 


^^^u^^^^b^t^^i^t^^^^ 


105.  The  «/m-hook  i«  often  conveniently  uhciI  in  the 
roiauie  of  a  word;  thus,  [^■''^ilictlonari/,  y'\u^  ^'^^' 
oliiliomiri/. 

10(i.  The  «-circlo  may  l)o  adtlcd  by  writing  it  dis- 
tinctly on  the  inside  of  these  hooks,  to  the  Btniight 
strokes  119  well  us  the  curves;  thus,  L   condiHons,       \c> 

invu»ton$. 

107.     \\onX)-»iasii.—  '\iOhjcct{on,\:>ti(hJection,  — =■ 

occdilon. 

IlEADlNQ    EXKRCISE   XXVIII. 

\.   r^  i_=  X  "l-  ^-^^    ^l'^   ^'\, 


/ 


■-r) 


\J-   \n,  'Vs-    t-^    ^-v?  X 

Wbitinq  Exeecise  XXIX. 

Pnfnn     stafon    kompafon,    ambifon,   kondifon,    negajon, 
ko3"kWon?d';[raJon,ytiInn,    inikafon,    ^"3""    -va.on 
iUl^on,   revolulon,    konsolajon.     emofon,     admijon,    najon, 
aSniJon.     Profuson,  reformafon,  sclekjon,  delegajon,  depri- 
vajon,  Bupervigon,  kohesou. 

Petijoner,   ekseknjoner,  okajonal,  '•«^°^nJo"ari.     Pafonz, 
aedijonz,  visonz,  efiisonz,  mijonz,  nojonz,  admmistrajonz. 


It» "^ 


:;-. : . . .   '' 


%. 


u 


Hcd  in  the 
rcv- 

np  it  flis- 
e  Btniight 
uns,   ""'^ 

cctlon,  — = 


K' 


^ 


o> 


• 


)n,  negajon, 
on,  invason, 
lijon,  najon, 
igajon,  depri- 

iri.  Pajonz, 
linistrajonz. 


WWV>l>«^  I  I  I  I   1    I 


-  I^Jt'L  'J  "I'    'J   '   '.  J 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1^ .%  J^>^. 


1.0    ^"^  I 

^^^^"^       i;^    ■3.2     Mi, 


I.I 


1.25 


2.5 


U£  Kb    122 

m 

U    11.6 


<^ 


/. 


^:^* 
^ 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTt:R,i4.Y.  14580 

(716)872-4503 


I 


m 


L<9 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


^\ 


mys'nm 


VOWKL  CONTRACTIONS. 


91 


108.    Vowel  Contractions.— The  vowels  being  so 
simply  and  easily  formed,  but  little  is  to  be  desired  in 
the  way  of  abbreviating  the  method  of  writing  them; 
but  as  considerable  time  is  lost  by  lifting  the  pen  in 
passing  from  one  to  another,  it  is  no  small  advantage  to 
write  two  vowel  sounds  in  one  sign,  where  it  can  be 
done  without  ambiguity.     Such  a  contraction  is  quite 
common  in  words  where  the  short  vowel  i  immediately 
precedes  another  of  the  simple  vowels ;  aa  in  the  words 
various,  effluvia,  enuncUition,  ratio :  becoming  nearly  like 
varyus,  effluvya,  enuncyation,  rasyo.       This  coalition  of 
vowels  so  nearly  produces  the  articulations  ye,  ya,  yo,  yn, 
that  the  signs  for  these  improper  diphthongs  are  used  in 
such  cases;  thus,  ^  mmw.,  .}>^  a»»ociation,   Xj^ 
ratio. 

109.  Dissyllabic  Diphthonqs.— The  following  is 
an  additional  scale  of  diphthongs,  simply  formed,  and 
some  of  which  are  very  useful : — 


as  in 
huis. 


*[  ei        >|  oi  >|  a» ; 

y>^  owing,    E_  $toic,   f 


110.     The  close  diphthong  heard  in  the  word  axjt, 
though  differing  but  little  from  "  \  i,  is  written  thus,  v] 

Beapino  Sxeboisk  XXIX. 

'^.    \~^  --^x    i^  V'   -J-i 

1; YTr=====^^^^''^*^'^^^^^^'' 


Ml^M^M******£^l*M 


92 


k********^^*^ 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOGaAPHY. 


r  I 


r. 


S    9         ^ 


■iW-»^ 


Wrwik?^  Exbboisb  XXX. 


serius,  konveniens,  eksperiens, 
.afon,  abreviajon,  paliajon,  alevi- 


Envius,  eroneua,  ^^ 
vftriajon,  enunjiajou,  \ 
afon,  homeopalli. 

Klfli   flei.  biloi,  stoikal,  gliy. 

Ambi^r  z  de  okason.  ov  sedifon  konf«50u.  and  desola- 
fon  W  urezez  'even'  evil  emojon  and  pajon. 

An  as  ^kiB  «P  a  Uonz  skin  hwiq  bad  'bm'  tron  awa,  Put 


^ 


*^k^^*^^*j 


5 


J,   eksperiens, 
aiajon,  alevi- 


,  and  desola- 

iron  awa,  put 
5an  tu  bra,  in 
bu  teribl  kc  .- 
bin  struk  wid 
osli,  he  8a>n  Be 
1  erz  stikig  3t 


<■«>< 


SHS  HOOK  EXBaciSE  AND  BBVIBW. 


Wid  no  hezitafon  he  ran  up  tu  de  as,  and  wid  his  kujel  bet 
him  severli,   saifl:  ^   «  i      v  *.  •  i 

"Yott  fool,  yo)  hav  'bin'  de  'okajon'  ov  Bkung  Ac  floks,  but  r 
havyo  tu  no  eldo  y«>  luk  Uk  a  Hon,  yot  yo,  bra  Ut  an  a.l" 

APLIKaXON— Afektajon  iz  Jv  tu  ekspoz  a  man  tu  de- 
rigon  in  proporjon  tu  hiz  asumjon. 

«,        _     M  ni  \  nn  whlcli  Ride  o£  the  itraieht  strokes  is  the  sAn-hook 
is  ay*  written? 


— 


^^^AAAA^fc^lA^^^^ 


r«.    "f-  :"''pS- 


ItBBcn  ID. 


,  -  :  HALF-LENGTH  STROKES. 

la  consequence  of  the  frequent  recurrence  of  the 
sounds  t  and  d,  it  is  found  very  eo-en.ent  and 
sometimes   necessary,  to  give  them  another  and   more 

^^;7lu;r;';^n:::;pi>-i-ansha^ 

resorted  to  for  the  purpose  of  giving  to  Phonography 
rultimatumof  hrevity;  and  if  ;t^fo!;--g.  «tTs 
has  only  the  semblance  of  philosophy  in  it,  it  ^ill  be  as 
Luch   Is  can  be  expected.     In  chemistry,  it  is   we 
known,  the  more  a  substancc-a  poison,  or  steam    for 
ins.an<^e-is  concentrated,  the  greater  is  its  power    so 
border  to  get  a  repetition  of  the  consonants  t  and  d 
without  writing  them  at  length,  the  single  strokes  1  and 
T  by  being  compressed  into  half  their  length,  are  made 
o"  re  resen!  the  Tddition  of  a  t  and  d     Resort  is  had  to 
the  same  means  for  the  addition  of  t  and  d  to  aU  the 
other  consonants,  except  the  strokes  y,  «-,  h,  ng,  which 
are  not  made  half-length. 

Ill  To  illustrate  this  principle,  suppose  the  word 
faded\s  to  be  written:  there  are  three  consonants  ,n  it 
S  downward  strokes,  which  would  carry  the  last  d  he 
SnZof  wo  strokes  below  the  line;  but  by  making  the 
fiXhalf  its  usual  length,  another  d  « -PP-*  ^^ 
added,  and  the  word  is  thus  neatly  written:  ^.  faded. 


Ill" 


t^^^^^A^it************* 


MkAIMM 


HALF   LENGTH   STROKES 


95 


oe  of  the 
ient,  and 
and   more 

eady  been 
onography 
ng  scheme 
will  be  as 
it  is   well 
steam,  for 
power :  so, 
its  t  and  d 
okes  I  and 
h,  are  made 
rt  is  bad  to 
I  to  all  tbe 
i,  ng,  wbich 

)e  the  word 
nants  in  it, 
i  last  d  the 
making  the 
pposed  to  be 
:   ^   fadfed. 


The  principle  is  further  illustrated  by  the  following 
words:  L  talk,  C  tallced;  /\  wrap,  />  wrapped;  (.  V 
live,  ^  lived. 

112  A  vowel  before  a  half-length  consonant  is  read 
before  both  letters;  as   \  apt,  ')  east,  ^  art,  ^  ac«;  but 
when  placed  after,  it  is  read  immediately  after  the  pr^ 
mary  letter,  and  the  ad.!ed  t  or  d  follows  it;  thus,  • 
caught,   ^  read,  \"  y>ite,  \^contempt,    /    little. 

113  As  a  general  thing  the  light  strokes,  when 
halved,  are  followed  by  the  light  sound  t;  as,  (  thought, 
^\  aift  "^  fought;  and  the  heavy  ones  by  the  heavy 
sounr '■;  thus,  J  n^d,  ^  W-  F-<J7"*\y; 
however,  the  heavy  sound  d  is  read  from  a  half-length 
light  consonant,  and  vice  versa,  the  light  sound  ^  is  read 
from  a  half-length  heavy  consonant;  as,  ^V  melted, 
\^  peopled,  r^^alpliabet. 

114  Since,  however,  the  heavy  strokes  occupying 
the  places  of  r,  I,  m,  and  n,  are  not  made  half-length, 
these  four  letters,  when  followed  by  a  rf,  are  for  the 
sake  of  distinction,  made  heavy;  as,  ^  cheered,  r  oM, 
^for^ned;  and  light  when  a  t  follows;  as,  -^^  art,  ]^ 
delight,  V  remit.  The  I  is  struck  upward  when  t  is  to 
be  added, 'and  when  d,  downward,  since  in  this  direction 

it  is  more  easy  to  make  a  heavy  stroke. 

115      Strokes  beginning  or  ending  with  the  «-circle, 

or  either  of  the  hooks,  or  both  hook  and  circle,  are  also 

made  half-length,  when   necessary ;   thus,  \  »J»««<^.  ]■ 

iwift,  T  treat,  X  complete,^  freighi,  ^•$traight,-\  leUled; 

•^  heads,  ^  mates,  \  band,  H»  patient,  %.  plant,  „  grand; 

the  order  of  reading  being  the  same  as  in  the  full  length 

strokes. 


I 


^•••iiSfwSSiw**^^^'^^^^^ 


»w»*»**»ww>»w****»^»*^ 


'Il< 


_i„_-_.._         "•  ^ 

96  MAWUAL  OF  PHONOORAPIIY 


116     It  muBt  be  observed  tbat  when  tbe  circle  .  is 
written  to  a  half-length  consonant  it  must  be  read  after 
the  added  t  or  d;  because  the  .  is  added  to  the  consonan 
after  it  has  been  halved,  and  because  it  cannot  be  added 
to  the  circle ;  thus,   ^  pat,  \i  pat,,  (notpcuK,)  V  /«'.  ^^ 

■^*'ll7"''Half Ingth  consonants,  unconnected  with  other 
strokes,  should  be  employed  only  for  '«'d«  °«';^'";"f 
but  onL  vowel;  as  <^  void,  ^'  night;  .nA  the  two  full 
length  letters  should^be  used  in^  words  containing  two 
or  mere  vowels;  as  Sh,  avoid,  -^  mtt 

118  The  past  tense  of  verbs  ending  like  \/  parj,  are 
more  conveniently  written  thus,  X/l'  parted,  than      j 

119  There  are  a  few  words  in  which  t  and  d  occur 
three  times  in  succession,  which  make  it  necessary  to  sep- 
arate the  half-length  from  the  bag  stroke;  as,  i\,  attitude. 

120  Since  the  half-lengths  occupy  only  a  portion  of 
the  usual  space,  they  follow  the  rules  given  to  the  hori- 
Bontals,  of  accented  vowel  positions,  above  or  on  the  line 
according  as  the  consonant  has  a  first,  second,  or  third 
place  vowel;  thus,  T  street,  ^  spread,  ^  find,  ^  found. 


Rkadinq  Exkbcwb  XXX. 


<^^     ,,    > 


«/A 


'■^- 


;»• 


»^,, 


oirole  *  is 
road  after 
consonant 
i{  be  added 
^.  /at,  \6 

with  other 
containing 
0  two  full 
lining  two 

J  part,  are 
than  ^\ 
id  d  occur 
sary  to  sep- 
J  1^  attitude. 

,  portion  of 
0  tho  hori- 
on  the  lino 
d,  or  third 
Z,  yj,  found. 


MaMMhMAAA'M*^ 


••--^ 


UALV   I,BN(»TII   HTROKIS. 


97 


IlKADINO    EXKRHfiR    XXXI. 

Pet.  fat.  fet,  lat,  mat,  not,  npf.t,  skot,  MTd,  sftU.  smit, 
gent;--p(Tnt,  bond,  kontend.  or.land,  enjand,  kind,  refiml, 
leBt^nO-in'l.  inind;-p«nt«,  bnnd..,  pretendz,  ko^t^"^;.  ^"'■ 
kHnt«;-frend,  advent,  hnrdli,  Miryd,  ''''"'"inid,  holdzr- 
[8trokeh:  hetcd,  habit,  hurld.l-perild.  opri».,  gvded,  delited, 
upward,  pereevd,  qild,  lektyu'd. 

121.     Under  certai'  circnmHtances  t  and  d  shonld  not 
he  represented  by  half-Ungth  strokes:     Firif,  When  a 
vowel  follows  /  or  d  at  the  end  of  a  word;  thus,  having 
_^  gutU,  we  cannot  make  f/uilty  by  placing  y  after  the 
half-length  I,  for  it  would  then  read  guilit;   hence  the 
stroke  t  must  be  written  in  order  to  give  a  place  after  it 
for  the  vowel;  thus,   ^"\ guilty.     Second,    In   many 
words  of  one  syllable,  where  if  the  vowels  were  omitted, 
or  indistinct,  they  would  be   mistaken  for  the  vowel 
word-signs;  thus,   \    had,  instead  of  \.;  ^    put,  in- 
stead of  \.         Third,  When  the  half-stroke  would  not 
make  a  distinct  angle  with  the  preceding  or  following 
stroke,  as  ^^"1  amand,  instead  of 


122. 


_  f  quite 
I  could 
f  particalar-ly 
\  opportunity 

.  f  that 
*  (without 

y  (gentlemen 
*^  I  gentleman 


great 

called* 

according-ly* 


aALF-LENOTH  WORD-SIGNS 

(God 

I  good 

f  cannot 
""^  I  account 

(went 
'^  \  wont 

(  not 
^  )  nature 

'"*     might* 
establish-ed 


^_^  f  immediate-ly 
"^  (  made 
(Lord 
(word 
told 
tov  ?  < 

though  f* 
afler 


) 

;    short* 


t/^ 


spirit* 
under 
world 





MANUAL  OF  PUONOQRAPHY 


JUADWa  EXBROISB  XXXI. 


^^^n£ia^ 


1 .1, 


P,^->i- 


^ 


8TBOKI8. 


Wbitino  Exercibb  XXXII. 
LGRENS  LaZI.  GR  LBRNIU  PONOQRAFI. 
Tu  lern,  er  'not-  tu  l^m,  'dat>  iz  de  kwe.tyon: 
Hwedor  -tiz  nobler  in  de  mind  tu  aufer 
He  kompleka  kwiblz  ov  ambigyxius  Looband, 
Gr  tu^^z  wid  pen  and  v,w  a  t«and  erorz. 
And.  bi  qKazifl.  end  dom?-Tu  l^rn.-tu  rit,- 
And.  bl  Fonografi  tu  sa  we  end 
ae  teUitiz,  de  t«hnd  tedyu.  ill  -; 

Lonhand  prodnsez— Iw  a  koii*umaJon 
m?«tUtubewiJt.     Tu  r^tj-tu  l^rn^ 
Tu  l«rn1  but  den  tu  wurki-qi,  dv  "  ««  "»«'• 
Fer,  tu  akwir  dis  art,  hwot  Url  nm  kum 
Ar  i  kan  fufl  of  mi  habite  old, 
Xud  giv  me  pez;  d^r-z  de  respekt 
•aat'  makB  Grtograf i  ov  bo  Ion  Itf; 
Fer  ho)  wud  bur  de  inutnerabl  ilz  ov  Lonhand, 
It«  bqrbarus  leB«,  its  ambigmti, 
lU  oild-tormentio  difikultiz,  and 

Its  wont  ov  rffil,  tugeder  wid  de  terl 
Hwic  patent  skribz  ov  suq  a  sistem  hav, 
Hwenlie  himself  'mU'  luz  relesraent  mak 
Wid  a  Duzn  Lesonz?    Hffi  yet  wud  yH* 
ais  barbaruB  relik  ov  '' M-gon  daz, 
But  'dat'  de  dred  ov  sumtiB  tu  be  l«rnt,— 
Caaf  wek  unmanli  ez,  from  hffiz  embras 
ko  lazi  man  kan  Kot,)-puzlz  de  wil, 
And  makB  him  rader  b^r  en  felsitiz, 
aan  19m  de  tra>t  he  yet  noz  imtifl  ov. 
au8  indolens  toft  oft  retqrdz  de  mjud, 
And  dus  de  progres  ov  a  j^ful  Vt 
Iz  oekt,  but  not  prevented;  fer  de  tim 
Wil  kum  hwen  dis  sam  bref  Fonografi 
YaX  triumf  ot  its  final  oponent 

,10.)  What  i»  the  .eoond  -ode  for  reprewnUng  «  and  d  ^ 
E,-^r„-theptil4hy  of  hawing 
&.  rule  for  knowing  whethwa^ or  •;*  »  ""^  ,.  ^^        - 


RiTiaw  -(110.)  What  in  the  »eoond  mode  for  re 
B.Tl«w.  J|^.,^^p,^,„,h.,,,„,.„on«)iiant.    (U 

Dwins 
heavj'for  the  *ddiHoi>  S.dt 


x^tr^K^s>€}t)^.T^\ 


rnorw;rUeir>aIfWhT    ^^^^ 


s"u.r»h^;ideivvr-dr  Tm.)  %^7^^t^^rnri?c:l;lt^irhl^hl 


rw»<^»»^^^ 


>A<>>^*****^ 


XtBun  U. 

SPECIAL  CONSONAirr  CONTRACTIONS. 

Tho  .-Circle,  initial  and  final  hooks,  and  half-length 
Btems,  are  contracted  modes  of  writing  ;.»>»."<»'"'*"[ 
general  application,  and  of  V^^^'^^^'^^'^'^l^J^' 
L  Phonography  studies  the  greatest  degree  of  abbrev.a- 
ion,  conLt^nl  wi^h  legibility,  a  few  comb.nat.ons  of 
consonants,  and  some  syllables  of  frequent  occurrence 
are  provided  with  special  forms  of  contraction,  some  of 
which  only  are  capable  of  vocalisation. 

Of  these  there  are  the  frequent  ,t,  in  th«  past  parti- 
ciple  of  verbs  ending  in  .,  in  the  superlative  of  adj^- 
lives,  and  in  many  other  words,  as  prmed  wx^t  ,uff, 
the  >tr  in  the  comparative  of  adjectives,  Ac,  ^faster 
n^tcr;  the  initial  in,  of  imtrucUon,  iri^nratum,  ifc';.,  and 
the  final  »;hn  of  some  nouns,  ^npontum;  "»»y/'^7 
it  would  often  be  inconvenient  to  write  with  the  means 

thus  far  aflforded.  .     ,  -         ^u     t  -♦;«    nf 

There  are  also  prefixes,  derived  from  the  Latm,  of 
frequent  occurrence,  but  of  inconvenient  length  as 
accL-plish,  incon-nderate,  recam-pen^,  enter-prise,  circum- 
vent The  method  of  writing  these  contractions  consti- 
Tutes  the  last  lesson  proper  of  the  -y"'*'"' "^  "  ^^ 
that  should  receive  special  attention.  ^^^^'^  '^^ '^' 
somewhat  arbitrary  mode  of  writing  shall  not  be  for- 

gotten. 


>**»••*••»•" 


p« ^ 


f^^^WW^^^^* 


balf-length 
t  admit  of 
tion.  But 
f  abbrevia- 
inationa  of 
occurrence, 
)n,  Bome  of 

>  past  partl- 
e  of  adjec- 
wiiest,  ttiff; 
i.,  as  fatter, 
m,  df'!.,  and 
ny  of  which 
I  the  means 

le  Latin,  of 
length,  as 
prxK,  cireum- 
itioDS  consti- 
,  and  is  one 
der  that  the 
not  be  for- 


.Vr    AND     .Vr«     LOOPS. 


101    I 


THE  LOOPS  ST  AND  STH. 
1 23  The  plan  of  writinK  K  in  »ome  shorter  way  than 
by  the  circle  .  and  stroke  t,  was  deviled  chiefly  for  he 
purpoHC  of  Htill  farther  obviating  the  d.fficul  y  of  words 
Juining  too  far  below  the  line.  By  simply  lengthen.ng 
he  "Lie  to  one-third  the  length  of  the  strike  on 
I'hVh  it  occurs,  the  sound  of  I  is  added;  th^.  No  ^-. 

I^  otW  wirds,  a'loop  writ'ten  one-third  the  length  of  the 
onsonant  to  which  it  is  attached,  represents  the  com- 
bined sounds  of  .  and  t,  with  no  vowel  between  them , 
and  by  license  it  may  also  represent  *</.         .     .       , 

I'M  The  •  or  z  may  be  added  for  plurals,  &c..  by 
striking  the  loop  through  the  long  ^■g";"^  f«™;"8  '''' 
circle  on  the  opposite  side;  an,  V.  «<*'"<•.    ;^   f  "•      . 

125.     This  loop  may  also  be  written  .nifally;  as  m 

the  words  '\  4,  -f   **-»''  V  •'«/'  <  '''''. ,^:to 
„,ay  be  used  between  two  strokes,  only  -\«°  >""«"?;' 
d,  ch,  j;  as  ^  tesHfy,   [r^  dUUnguuh,  ^  Wy. 
126      When  this  loop  is  written  in  the  position  of  the 
r-hook.  like  the  .-circle  it  Ukes  the  additional  power  of 
♦hus     X  slooper    ^  ttkker ;  and  when  tamed  m 
itL/posX;  it  assumes  the  power  of  that  hook ; 
as   j-    cmdensed,  -o  agaimt.  ,  ^      . ,         .« 

227      Half-length  strokes  also  admit  of  the  .Moop,  to 
a  limited  extent;  as  '^  mW./,  .S»t^ent 

128      When  a  word  begins  with  a  vowel  followed  by 
^  o'!.,  the  half-length  st^ke,  and  not^e  U^must 
be  used;  as,  -iX  hi^ary,    )^  Wom,  '^  ^. 
129.     By  extending  the  loop  to  two-thirds  Ae  length 

of  tie  stro'ke,r  is  added;  as  in  ^^^^  -f  '^.^^Ti 
]   thter,  ^.  master.    This  loop   should   not  be  used 


I  I  I  I  ■  -  • '  ■  ■  l!.!**.  *  *  ** 


n  n  t     -1 * 


I  I  f  -  -  -  I  I  I  1 1  «.^^»^ 


102 


MANUAL   CF   PHONOGRAPHY. 


initially.    It  may  be  turned  on  the  n-hook  side  of  the 

stroke  to  express  r«fr;  as  X  i>»'«^''!  f^  f«  ""^'L' 
may  be  used  as  with  the  sMoop;  thus,    i^  fe»ter»,   ^^. 

mcaters.  ^  ,    . 

130.  WoRD-siaN.— The  8<-loop  is  used  as  a  word-sign 
for  first,  written  on  the  line  and  inclined  to  the  right, 
thus,  0. 

BBAoma  ExEEOisB  XXXIT.        " "    ^ 

(f-^    ^     ^   -f^  >«  • 

■Writing  Exeroisk  XXXIII. 

Past,  boat,  dust,  tast,  qest,  koat,  gust,  *«8». , '»Jf«^,  "^f*' 
arest,  ^zd,  rust,  lest,  last,  mist,  most,  am^zd,  tipest  de- 
St:-sta)p.  stedfast,  stagnant,  atu,  stov,  ster,  st  1,  stem; 
3.per;Z  er,  stoger;-di8tiBktli,  justifikafonj-besto^  IxDsts, 
k^ste  reziste.  infelts,  masts -,-81111.  8t?rd  stord,  Btamt;- 
kondinsragenst  Boster,  bluster,  faster,  blister,  "ster  im- 
p^Iterl-punster,  spinsters.  Stated,  advanst,  suprest,  pretekst, 
prodiist,  ^ 


H>  H'l 


Bide  of  the 
the  circle  « 
'esterg,    ^^, 

a  word-sign 
»  the  right, 


•I  -^ 

I 


V-v 


•r 


[. 

t,  safest,  rcast, 
,zd,  finest,  de- 
ter, stil,  stem; 
i;— bests,  bosts, 
itord,  stamt; — 
Bter,  sister,  im- 
iprest,  pretekst, 


>•*••*••*••**" 


«AA«i^^M*^^^^ 


I  I  r  •     '  I  »  If— •--j|_2j; 


I  I  I  1  -  -  -  I  I  «  «  *i 


EXEECI8E8  ON  THE  ST  LOOP. 


103 


Beading  Exeeoisb  XXXIII. 


^  .  *-^« .  n  ^  -t  '  w^ 

"  t  °. '  x^  -  ^  ^'^^• 

Writing  Exercise  XXXIV. 

rrp  TFMPEST  —On  de  'f^rst'  da  ut  de  master  ov  wr  fast 
.af^^'v  Js5>^  mids?ov  a  kV  FS^V^^-",;?  ^fg 

■uprest  3r  f erz  and  satli  reqt  dc  land. 


M<v«« ' 


;5iSi5;i55»555<^^5;^S5^*^ 


Jill    iiiaiiMiliiiiiMMitiii 


I  I  I  I  r  •  -Ji^^i*^^ 


104 


MANUAL  OP  PHONOGRAPHY 


PECULUB  MODE  OP  WBITINQ  N  AND  SHIf. 
131.     When  the  sounds  upr,  sir,  and  skr  follow  n  in 
such  words  as  inspiraHon,  instruct,  inscribe,  it  is  impossi- 
ble with  the  former  mode  of  writing  n,  to  write  the  circle 
,r  to  the  strokes  p,  t,  h,  without  making  it  on  the  back 
of  the  n,  thus  "^  ,  which  is  difficult  to  do    and  un- 
seemly when  done.    To  obviate  this  difficulty  the  stroke 
v^  i8  permitted,  in  these  cases,  to  be  struck  backward 
or  vertically,  as  the  nature  of  the  case  may  require ;  but 
as  there  is  never  occasion  for  any  vowel  but  the  first 
place  i,  the  stroke  for  the  n  need  not  be  written  full 
length;  indeed,  it  may  be  regarded  as  the  n-hook^d 
initially;  thus,  H^  instruction,  -^irwiperable,    •      \. 

*"*i3f '"'in  a  consideralle  class  of  words  the  syllable 
tion  follows  after  the  sound  of  s  or  z,  as  positian,  deciswn, 
&c  which  would  require  that  the  strokes  for  these 
sounds,  with  the  sA^-hook  appended,  be  employed;  but 
Buch  would  be  inconvenient  forms,  and  hence  it  is 
allowable  to  use  the  circle  and  turn  a  hook  for  Hon  on 
the  opposite  side  of  the  stroke;  thus,  ^  dec^^n,  >e 
supposUion;  the  same  license  is  allowed  for  the  loops  . 

and  8fr;  thus,  V^^^*'"'^"'  -^  »«'«'^«'»'^-  ^^'l 
hook  is  used  in  some  such  words  as  >«  permaswn;  and 
it  may  also  be  used  when  followed  by  the  termination 
al;  a,s,\  podiional 

133  ^  If  it  be  required  to  write  the  syllable  tion  after 
„,  the  circle  for  the  latter  combination  may  be  em- 
ployed, and  the  hook  turned  on  the  opposite  side ;  thus, 
V  compensation.  The  plural  may  be  formed,  m  all 
|hSe  cases,  by  adding  the  circle  to  the  afcn-hook;  ihur, 
fJi  mperstituyiu,  S^  condensations. 


F*WW 


F*^^*********'"*''**""' 


jllow  n  in 
,8  impossi- 
3  the  circle 
I  the  back 
),  and  un- 
the  stroke 
:  backward 
quire ;  but, 
at  the  first 
rritten  full 
-hook_  used 
able,    '     \, 

khe  syllable 
Ion,  decision, 
a  for  these 
ployed;  but 
hence  it  is 

for  tion  on 
decision,  /^ 
the  loops  St 
'ation.  This 
suasion;  and 

termination 

ble  tion  after 
may  be  em- 
be  side ;  thus, 
i9rmed,  in  all 
t-hook;  ihar, 


bxasiho  exeboisb  xxxiv. 

■Wbitisg  Exercise  XXXT. 
insnperabl.  instrukt    i" J--"*;,!^^^^^^^  SJS 

1    kost  yo)  sum  ttubl  at  ^^^^k J^' '^..^ifon  „v  hwic,  qast  and  p«er- 

ful  ritio  iz  bast.  P'^"^^^  "l^  ,^^^2  on  everi  kost,  m  spit 
man  stemz  de  stermz  ov  de  J*!""''  ''^^  ^  ^,  a^  i^and  ov  unE-.il- 
ov  de  gratest  danjerz  ariz  0  ^^^^JJXm.rs,  kontendiB  agenst 
izd  man.  Relijon  foloz  i"  f^?^°*  yest  wid  da  U*  ov  siv- 
kevilz;anddus  hwilsavajna^  ov  inspirSon.  and 

,w ^ 


r I I  I  I  -  •  •  - ' 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOORAPHT 


R«T«W.-<123.)  How  we  it  and  ed  written?  (124.)  How  may  the 
oirale  be  addidT  (l26.)  In  what  sltaaUoni  may  the  looP  be,''""'"^ 
(126.)  When  writtin  in  the  plaee  of  the  r-hook,  what  power  doe«  t  e.vo 
the  stroke?  What,  when  written  in  the  n-hook  place?  (127.)  How 
ahonld  the  woid.  midtt  and  Hudtnt  be  written?  (\280  In  whatoase  is 
the  1<»P  not  to  be  nied?  (129.)  How  is  Ur  written?  What  efteot  doeo 
U  ha^oS  thU  loop  to  pla^  it  on  the  n-hook  side?  If  the  fo»f.d '>^,  *  J"": 
bw.  how  is  it  wAtten?  (130.)  WJat  i.  the  """l-'V^i  l?,*^-/  How 
(131.)  When  is  it  necessary  to  use  the  peeuliar  mode  of  writ  ng  nr  uow 
sit  written?  (132.)  Under  what  oiroumstancjs  is  the  peculiar  '*»  em- 
ployed? How  is  it  Written?  (133.)  Suppose  it  be  reqnfred  to  wnte  An 
Sf  tirw,  how  U  it  done?    If  »  f eUow  the  An,  how  may  it  bo  written? 


^^u^^Ssi 


How  may  the 
lop  be  written? 
rer  does  it  give 
t  (127.)  How 
In  what  cage  is 
liat  effeot  doeji 
aound  of  i  fol- 
in  this  leMun? 
riting  nf  How 
euliar  thn  em- 
id  to  write  iHm 
9  writtent 


XtSBBU    12.  ■  ■'  ^^ 

PBEFIXBS  AND  OTHBB  OONTBAOTIONS.     ^,      ,  . 

134.    PaBriXEB.-TbefoUowiBg  are  some  additio^^^^ 
piL  and  affixes  that  are  found  co-eme^*-^^^^^ 
Ltive  with  the  advanced  phonographer.     They 
be  written  near  the  word,  but  not  joined. 

Acc^  is  expressed  by  a  heavy  dot,  placed  before^ 
initial  end  of.the  following  consonant,  thus,   V^ 

acampany,   <^  acamplice. 

«,„^  fc,  .  ™.U  .we  placed  i.  *•  ^Z^, 
tion  of  the  next  consonant;  as,    J.  circw 
V~^  drcumscribe. 

Decom,  by    1    as,  I^S   cfc«>mj,oririon. 

I  I    y|     disconcerted. 

Discom,  diacm,  by  b  as.  bo'  ^  *  „f 

.  V,  ^  bitten  above  the  other  part  of 

Jncom.  tn«m,  by     ^  ,       ^incarm»tmt. 

the  word ;  as,  X*  tnconipteie,      uy 
■^     V,,  -  in  any  position  near  the  following 
Inter,  xutro,  by  -in  anypo^    ^        i„«,od«c*to«.     By 

some  kind  of  Ucense  lu        ^  ^ 

allowed  to  be  written  thus:     T  .  the  pren 
being  united  with  the  stroked. 

L     "N  «a   "ViT^  irreconcilahle. 
Jrrecon,  by      >  as,      ^      ^ 

(107) 


If 


^**A*A*<i*AA^*A**A**J  HI  ,tt»AA^^^^»^f^^»*****^^*^^^*****' 


108 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOQBAPHY. 


Magna,  magni,  by  ^"^  written  above  the  after  part  of 
the  word;  as,  "T^^"^  nuignanimom,      V^  magnify. 

Recog,  by  /  as,  /W*  recognize. 

Ream,  ream,  by  Z'  as,  /^  recowMneiuZ,  x^Sn  recon- 

Self,  by  a  circle  at  the  middle  place  of  the  next  conso- 
nant; as,  J^  nelfith. 

Vncom,  uncon,  by  .„^  written  on  the  line ;  as,  ^^  wn- 
amimon,  s^A,  unamdititmal. 

It  is  allowable  to  represent  a  prefix  which  is  nmilar 
in  sound  to  one  of  the  foregoing,  by  one  of  the  signs 
there  furnished;  thus,  ^  may  represent  enter,  as  well 
as  inter;  and  — ^  may  represent  encum,  incum,  as  well 
as  incom,  inam. 

135.  Affixes. — The  following  affixes  are  written 
near  the  preceding  part  of  the  word: — 

Bility,  by  \  as,   y\durahility,  "^  probabilitt/. 

Ly,  by  C  written  after  the  word ;  thus,  V>  /^  patiently, 
if /^  constantly.  But  where  it  can  be  written  on 
without  lifting  the  pen,  it  is  better  to  do  so ;  thus, 
X<  abundantly. 

Ment,  by  '->  as,  -^  atonement,  J>»  amten^nent.  But 
it  may  often  be  written  without  disconnecting  it 
from  the  body  of  the  word. 

Self,  by  a  circle,  as,  "^  myself.  Selves,  by  making  the 
circle  double  size ;  as,  (o  them/selves,  (^  yourselves. 

Ship,  by  y  as,  'V  lordship. 

136.  A  word-sign  may  be  used  as  a  prefix  or  an 
affix;  as,  ^   advantageous,      iC  hereafter. 


rww^^^^w^^^^^ 


> f 


fter  part  of 
^  magnify. 

?S'\  recon- 
next  oonso- 


as, 


«n- 


b  is  timilar 
)f  the  signs 
iter,  as  well 
urn,  as  well 

are  written 

bability. 

f^  patientli/, 

written  on 

lo  so;  thus, 


itment.    But 
)nnecting  it 

making  the 
)    yourselves. 


109 


EXERCISE  ON  PREFIXES   AND   AFFIXES 


Rbadinq  Exibciss  XXXV. 

-^-     ^  ;    <\  ^\  ^^    ■^ 
^^.^-^  V^,- V  >'A..I  (, 


I-  T«^'^rji.-s^^v 


U 


i^^_i_,    _i— -1'.  >^^,>^,>^ 

7l0~  MANUAL  OF  PHONOOBAPHY. 


hrf^^iiMk^A^AAi*^ 


I!' 


Writing  Bxbbcish  XXXVT. 

hersmanjip,  darter,  displosMr. 

Lern  tu  akomodat  ymnelf  tu  sflrkumBtansez.     S^rkumBtan- 

I  dat  luvz,  but  flat  i  luv  m|«iU. 

137.    NOMINAL  CONSONANT.-It  is  Bometimes  neces- 
sary to  express  one  or  more  vowels  or  diphthongs  with- 
ouTa  consonant.    In  this  case  f    )^    >,  may  be  em- 
pLed  as  outlines  having  no  specific  values  to  which 
Kwelsmaybe  placed;  thus    '^E    for ^«.ard  or 
Edmund:   <   A.,  for  Alfred;   'Jr.   Eah,  an  I"8h  family 
S^^Tame  &!    The  dash-vowels  may  be  struck  tl.r^K 
the  nominal  consonant,  as    T    0.,  for   OUver    \   U 
Proper  names  should  be  written  in  full  when  they  are 
known. 


>*w»^»»^'**' 


»*»^»»»^ 


rWWVW  III      I  •  I 


OiM>i>^«l^*^*****0*******'**^**  I  n«>« 


VARIOUS   CONTRACTIONS. 


Ill 


138.  Strokk  jy.— The  stroke  h  is  generally  used 
when  it  is  initial  and  is  followed  by  «;  thus,  ^^ 
hasten;  also  when  r  and  a  vowel,  or  r  and  some  other 
consonant  follow;  thus  .^-^  hurry,  „^  horizontal, 
^^^"^  hurt;  also,  m  worrfs  that  contain  no  other,  conso- 
nant than  W,  and  end  in  a  vowel;  thus,    .^-^     holy. 

139.  Vocalizing  thb  LABai  Circle.— The  large 
circle  m  is  understood  to  represent  a  syllable  containing 
the  vowels  i  or  e,  thus,  »t»  or  $e$.  It  may  be  vocalized 
to  express  any  vowel  or  diphthong;  as,    "{O^  per»uame. 

140.  When  p  occurs  between  m  and  t,  and  k  he- 
tween  ni?  and  sh,  (the  p  and  k  being  organically  inserted 
in  speech,  in  passing  to  the  next  consonant,)  these  let- 
ters  may  be  omitted;  thus,  ^  Ump,  U  hmped,  ^^ 
,tamp,   <rv  'tamped,  ^^  anxiou,,   \p    disHnctim. 

In  cases  where  t  comes  between  .  and  another  conso- 
nant, the  t  may  generally  be  omitted  without  detriment 
to  legibility ;  thus,  ^  moMy,  ^  re.{fc«,  >^  po^A- 
pane,  ^-tr*    mi»take. 

141*  Op  the.— The  connective  phrase  "of  the," 
which  merely  points  out  that  the  following  noun  is  in 
the  possessive  case,  is  intimUed  by  writing  the  words 
between  which  it  occurs  near  to  eocfc  oOur,  thus  showing 
by  their  proximity  that  the  one  i8_o/  the  other;  thus, 
r')^X^  low  of  the  beautiful,  V^  *^'^* «/  '**  «"^*- 

written?    JH«j«  »»<)««'    &\rJid,lx«t  woid-rtfit  in  thU  oon- 
nwjtlont    (1370  Bxpuun  TOB  n™»  (13».)  flow  nwy  the  donW« 

Wh»t  U  Mud  of  the  phme  tjf  tht. 


r 


ti 


ItsBon  13 


tmVOOALlZED  WRITINQ-rHBASEOOBAKny.  *C. 

.anuer  of  writing  '':^^^^J'^lXtT,  i^^^  learner 
that  would  not  adujU  of    uU  voca^^^  ^^^,^    ^^^.^^_^^ 

„ay   commence   on^^^J^^  ^^^^^  ,^i„^  these 

reporting,  no  vowels  ar  ^^^  f,om  an- 

one  that  is  -XTZ.^t^^^consomni  outline.     It 

other,  -^- YLg^^^^^^  -^^^  ^^«  ^y^^'"  *" 

requires  a  good  degree  oi  '  readily.     After  re- 

143.    Positue   «»»    nog".'™  '"'™  „. 

,aie  consonants,  «^ould  l>e  — jh^^  t^^^^^^ 

r  TW  :r^rt  J    P;:i TI  the  positive  word. 

1  "'>  "r::?  '^%n::::::--r-;  b-ei^stinguished 

^  ^"*«^;'  "~-.,i,e  on  the  line,  and  the  negative 
hy  '"  -g  *\«/;;^  HasTs,  insert  the  initial  vowel  in 
above  It.  In  ''^^ ^^^^'^^  Ar  .^fe^^fc,  &c.  The  vowel 
the  negative  :'«'*  i  *^^'*;'  .S.  '^  ^^t  be  omitted, 
should  be  written  first,  that  it  may  no* 


fc^^fc^^J  I  I  1 1 1«< 


WOnim   HAVING   TUB   SAME   CONSONANTS. 


PHY,   *0. 

exefci8C9    the 
en  introduced 
n,  the  learner    | 
ast  prominent 
al  thing  these 
wcls.     But  in 
an  occasional 
word  from  au- 
nt outline.     It 
I  the  system  to 
ily.     After  re- 
to  go  over  the 
•els,  so  that  any 

containing  the 
d  thus -.—When 
liis  letter  is  fol- 
ic positive  word, 
>;  thus,  y\  re- 
~^S~  irresolute. 

^-v/_  immortal, 
t)e  distinguished 
ind  the  negative 
initial  vowel  in 
&c.  The  vowel 
b  be  omitted. 


LIST  OF  WORDS  CONTAINING  THE  SAME  CONSONANTS. 

IHUinguUh4d  Iv  «  difftreno*  of  outlin*. 

sy^  \\    pattern,  patron 

y^     \       patient,  passionate 

\/N     'V       purpose,  perhaps 

«\    \yf      proceed,  pursued 

«V         «V  property,  propriety 

'V.«V-.  N    o  preparation,  appropriation  proportio 

fv         *V      A   proportioned,  proportionate. 

<\_j  ^       protection,  production 

^  \/J)   pertain,  appertain 

<\_  \A*     prosecute,  persecute 

^       \J'^    prosecution,  persecution 

■Nv       \/)      oppressor,  pursuer 

.         \  beautify,  beatify 

\/f  A.  birth,  breath 

l/|      1      "L   Tartar,  traitor,  trader 

3      1/  train,  turn 


I  r  I     


m  1 


Itl. 


114 


_  I    I      jjj^       JJ"" *** 

MANl i.VL  or  PIIONOORA'MIY 


I 


\        1^^  attainable,  tcnablo 

)i_.    L        daughter,  debter,  and  deter 

Ly.-!:^  k  auditor,  auditory,  editor 

I      I     diseased,  deceased 

y     L    desolate,  dissolute 

Jo     L  desolation,  dissolution 

f       J/*^     idleness,  dullness 

I         t-^j     demonstrate,  adnjinistrate 

/,    •     af;ent,  gentleman 
/    A^    gentle,  genteel 
""**  '    r        cost,  caused 


'-'__y7._™^C2- collision,  coalition,  collusion 
*~\^  *~"V7    corporal,  corporeal 
*~3  credence,  accordance 

r"^    *n^  greatly,  gradually 

Vo^     V^  favored,  favorite 

V<.      \f,         fi8Cf>\  :)hysioal 


^^MMK«MMI**^^*< 


WORDS   IIA-VI^O  THE   BAMk    OON90NANT8 


'V-s    ^S^^  '""'•  framo,— I'olM,  farm 
\,     *N  Bupport,  sopufttto 
P      f        Btendy,  Btudy,— stead 
f      gituation,  station 
0      y       sure,  assure 
>\    x-^     labored,  olaborato 

""i    learned,  v.,  adj. 
yi    V^  ^    A    writer,  reader,  orator,  rhetor 

/^    //^   ruined,  renewed 
>-^     O    impatient,  impassioned 
^-V^  ■ — ^   innovation,  invasion 
^V^   .^       indefinite,  undefined 
v_-        — ^    unavoidable,  inevitable 


^ 


This  list  might  be  greatly  extended,  but  space  w  U 
not  permit  it  here;  from  the  examples  given  the  s  •■ 
dent  will  learn  what  form  to  give  '^f^^f'J^H 
different  outlines  are  required  for  words  that  migh  be 
misread  if  written  alike.  Quite  an  extensive  ho 
words,  two  or  more  of  them  having  the  «anie  outline^ 
neees  arily,  are  distinguished  by  position;  of 'hieh  take 
the  following:  piety,^  pity,»  opposition, x  position,* 
possession;'    prescription, i-   proscription  =»,  &c. 


ii.\.i. -^ 


I 


MANUAL  OF  PHONOaBAPaY 


ALL  THE  WOED-SIGNS  ALPHABETICALLY  ARRANGED 
Thc»  marked  ivUh  a  *  au  umtUn  above  the  line. 

I    dear 
e__  difficulty 
I    do 
J    done 

)    establish-^^^j 
"^  every 
0  first 
^for 
"^  from 
l^^full 
</  general-ly 
</   gentleman 
</    gentlemen* 
—  give-n* 

-  God* 

—  good 
e—  great 
V  have 
/-~x  him 

A      how       ';; 

V    I* 

■^  immediate-ly* 
/-^  important* 
^^— ^  improve-ment 


^FW 





I_l_l  I  I « I  1 1  I  '  '  '* 


BRANGED. 

lint. 

* 

* 

ingdom* 

vnguage 

iord* 

aember 

night* 

nore 

Mr.* 

; 

my,  me* 

; 

nature                | 

no 

,; 

nor* 

not* 

object 

objection 

of*  : .. 

oh        -  • 

' 

on* 

; 

•  one 

'  opinion* 

opportunity 

: 

or* 

J 

m^ 


ALL   THE  WORD-SIGNS. 


"  ought* 
"\    particular* 
Vo  Phonography 
_y'  pleasure 
\  prineip[J-'J 
—  quite* 
<?"'  remark* 
N  remember 

y  shall-t 

J?  short* 

/    should 

)     80 

'N  spirit* 
\  subject 
\j  subjection 

_/  sure 
f    tell,  till 
<    that* 
•    the* 
(    them 
(^   then 


')   their,  there 
— ' thing* 
(     think 
C   this 
(    thought* 
)   three 
s     to 

together 

r   told 
T    toward 
]    truth 
\    two 
»_   under 

\  «P 
\  upon 
y  usual 

)    was 
"^  way 

'  we* 
(Twell 
c-^  went* 


«/ 


On  the  following  page  is  a  different  class  of  word- 
signs,  their  signification  being  indicated  by  the  position 
in  which  the  sign  is  written  to  the  line.  Three  positions 
are  recognized:  on  the  line,  above  the  line,  and  through 
or  below  the  line.  In  the  table  the  line  of  writing  is 
suggested  by  a  dotted  line,  which  will  guide  the  learner 
as  to  where  the  word  should  be  written. 


CONTBACTED  WORDS. 


119 


perfect 

practicable 
read 

see 
than 


CONTRACTED  WORDS. 
In  addition  to  the  word-signs  that  have  been  given, 
represented  by  the  alphabetic  signs,  simple  and  com- 
pound,  a  list  of  contracted  words  is  given  below.  These 
are  abbreviated  by  giving  the  more  prominent  conso- 
nants  that  would  be  employed  in  writing  the  word  in 
full      Words  having  a  *  affixed  are  written  above  the 


line. 

~y  acknowledge 

7  acknowledged 

because* 
L  doctrine 

\  especial-ly 
— \  expensive 
~~\/  extraordinary 
"~*\     extravagant 
\^  forward 

^^/^  highly* 

x-T)  himself 

\  imperfect 

CT^iJ  imperfection 

'"^  importance* 
<r:*5y..  impracticable 

^  inconsistent 


^  indispensable 
"■■V  individual* 
>— 5  influence* 
«^-<^'  influential* 
\  instruction 
^  interest 

"^^_  irregular 
^  knowledge 
manuscript 

•  myself* 

•  natural 


•/ 


never 


^^'  nevertheless 

v_^new 

^.^  next 

^  notwithstandin.i 


\now 


»*ww^^>*^>*^ 


I 


_f  -  -  -  -  -  I  I     ■  •  • *  * 


AAAAAAAAd^*^*^^ 


120 


JIANUAL   OP   PIIONOGRAI'HY 


I  ,  I  I  I  f  -  -^.^jt^AM^  I  I  Iit4 


^  several 
^-^^  soraetbing 
VV^     Spelling  Beform 
S^  surprise 
J->^  transcript 

\u>  transgress 
^f    understand 
'^   understood 

^V    universal 

whenever 


\ peculiarity 

V^.  Phonetic  Society 
\/  Phonographer 
V, —  Phonographic 
\  probabifi^ 

\  publiSuon 
/"""  regular 

/^\  represent 
/\  I  represented 
/'X,  representation 
/\.    republic 
A^  respect 
r^  responsible 
—^  satisfaction 

In  the  complete  reporting  style,  the  list  of  contracted 
words  is  considerably  extended;  but,  like  the  above, 
they  are  all  very  suggestive  to  the  reflective  student, 
and  when  met  with  in  correspondence  or  elsewhere, 
there  will  seldom  be  any  difficulty  in  determining  what 
they  are.  The  Reporter's  Manual,  advertised  at  the 
close  of  this  book,  contains  complete,  lists  of  word- 
signs,  contracted  words,  phraseography,  Ac,  the  study 
of  which  will  be  ssential  to  verbatim  reporting,  but 
unnecessary   for   ordinary   purposes  of  writing. 


»» 


liVWVW'^W^""*"' 


^-<^  whensoever 
,/V  wherever 
J^  wheresoever 


F»^>^W 


^^M^^^^***; 


k^hdi^ 


AA^t^AA***' 


msoever 

irever 

resoever 

1  of  contracted 
ke  the  above, 
Bctive  student, 
or  elsewhere, 
ermining  what 
rertised  at  the 
lists  of  word- 
Ac,  the  study 
reporting,  but 
writing. 


PHBASEOQEAPHT. 


PHRi  SEOGBAPmr. 

144.  Phraseography  consists  in  writing  twQ  or  more 
worC-signs  together,  without  lifting  the  pen ;  and  in  the 
reporting  style,  it  is  extended  to  the  writing  of  word- 
signs  with  words  written  in  full,  but  not  vocalized.  The 
first  sign  in  a  phrase  should  be  written  in  its  natural 
position,  while  those  that  follow  take  any  position  that 
most  facilitates  the  writing. 


all  which 
' — ""^  any  thing 
"^      are  not 


ii^agi|ifiii'Siig<^*'^*'^"''' 


tH  iimiiiiii.nwiiii  V*'''*"" 


M «*< 


I  I  I  I  --  I  llti*« 


123 
PHBASEOOBAPHY. 


1 


1     there  are 
*)     there  are  not 
1^   there  would  not 


5        wo  were 
c: S>    when  there  is 


"V 


whether  or  not 


there  would  not  haye  I    ^       which  would 
been 


C      think  that 
G     this  is 
V     to  be 

s       to  do 

^       to  have 

,y^     you  should  be 

^    you  will 

yX  you  will  be  able  to 

^      you  will  not 
V.     ve  have 
Vj     we  have  not 
\,^_^  we  have  not  had 


/        which  would  not  be 
I        which  it  would  be 


which  it  would  have 
been 


P      will  not 
'  \     will  not  be 

/       without  doubt 

/      with  which 
?      with  which  it 
L   with  which  it  ifl  not 
^    who  are 
^      would  be 
5_^  would  not  be 


^^f^^HififSf^iim 


MANUAL  0?  PHONOGRAPHY^ 


|t|' 


5| 


A  W  of  caution  is  ^-^-^l^^TT^^^^^ 
use  of  phtaseography;  .t  sbou  d  "ever  be  * 

destroy  the  Uneality  of  the  -' ^^^^    .^f  ^  tmov- 
joinings.     In  -^^" --V^^^^^^  aLsh. 

ing  the  pen  from  the  P^"' ^^  ^.^e  other  unimportant 
In  phraseography,  "'".'^'/^J^/    i„  the'u,<yrld; 

,a.  iV7;7^XrThe'connective  .ord  an.  i- 
V^^   /or  the  take  of.   J^°  ^    ^     following 

stroke;   ,   anZ  the,  y  and  u,hu^h. 

WEITINO  E«^ci8E  XXXVII.  ^^^^ 

N0T..-Tn  the  foUowing  •«'«t  w'ri^n,  h^/^e  i^dfcat«l  byd«be.; 

fii     fil  biz  (Glz)  -  i«  lost,  -  hwiq.  -  <li8,  -  dat-iz-sed, 
—  min,  (men,)  —  '^^^^   Z\ara 

_8um^k8tent,--luv.--him^     «^^     _  _  _  ^ot, 

Ho,.    Ha>-iz-d.8.  -v^d^-_^»°^(       t.f 
(man-t.)  —  kan  —  no.  -V,  ^^"J      __  not-hav-sed, 

Sud.    Sud-be,  —  not-be,  —  Hav, 

tijR'i-dat.  t^  _  a<D,  (had,)  —  — 

*-./-TK":^nnrh.^  --not,(widhuk,) ---hm. 
not,(don-t,hadnt)-hav  .,  11„ever,  -  ned,  -  — 

_  kan-not,  -  M  -  «JB!^     rU-veri-sori-inded,  -hop- 
not-sa,  —  hop.  —  ^"'--^.^^  hav-no-diit. 


ijl^" 


:,vri^'/n^^,^«^|m^»t>v•^  '  '  H'lSJiJ'"'"^!" 


too  extensive 
)e  allowed  to 
make  difficult 
ed  by  remov- 
ing afreBh. 
:  uttixnportant 
tn  the  world; 
^ord  and  i8 
the  following 
nail  horizontal 


II. 

ing  the  initial  words 
indioatwlbydMbei; 
,j  bypiMDi. 

dia,  —  dat-iz-sed, 

^r,  —  me,  (mi,) 
hiz,  — advantaj, 

nj,  —  us,  ~  h^r, 

-  bin, dun, 

neni. 

-  ma, not, 

■n-U 

U), 


—  not-hav-sed, 


-  d<D,  (had,)  —  — 

buk,) bin. 

er,  —  ned,  —  — 
sori-inded,  —  hop- 
Hi. 

eni,  —  ma,  —  Bo- 
rn mm 
1,  —  ya>-ma,  —  wil,      , 
just, he.89rten.    \l 


Uk***MWk^ 


EXEBC18K  ON   PURA8K0GBAPIIY. 


125 


We.    We.w?r,  -  da>,  --  did.  -  hay,  -  -  sen,  -  t^V^, 

^vr'wW -"T-  «at     Hw,r.iz.  (hw^r-z)  (r  up- 

"  Tlwot    Hwot-iz.  —  w«r,  —  wud,  —  do,  —  if,  —  V,  — 

'tud."wuri'-  H  -  da>.  -  hav.  -  .ot.  -  not-hav- 

"'b.    Be-Md,  -  abl.tu.    Bi-dis,  -  me,  -  meni.  -  sum- 
menz,  —  everi-menz,  -  sum-p^reonz,  -  OJir. 

T.     It-iz, not, sed,  -■  -  8«i.n    ( the  laat  two 

with  a  double  circle,) "l- "  ""' rjL*"'t[I  ""  ' 

wud.    et-tu-be.    At-suQ,  -  prezent,  -  de-sam-tim. 

D.    D<i)-da,  —  not,  (  don't,)  —  — d«t. 

G.     Hwig-wud.  -  had.  -  kud,  -  kan.  -  haz  -  -  b  n, 

-  iz-not,  --  v, not,  -  ma.  -  mit,  -  wil.  (q-1.)    amq. 

u  u        _  mn wud. kud-not-hav. 

F   It^at-^  vo^  -dar,  (doublo-f  alxjve  the  lino.)     Fer- 
,u^- J!_':U. '- hwir-  -mrtim.  -  djtr.  (double-f  on  the 

J^:  J  4r  Jn?-  wei;  -  B«.n.  -  muq.     Everi-pvt,  -  wun, 

—  person.  —  man. 

C    Rink-dat.  -  y<D-qr. ^''>  ^ -:""__  :. 

,  ^Wn'^''''''woz'"-r--not.  -i'not,  -  -  tu-be. 
-*^az  '- hwina.w?r?-  do,,  --had.  --  hav,  -  ma.    ^ia- 

tim   —  da    —  advantaj.     av-wud,  —  kun,  —kud. 

£hav.ffi.  -  iz.  (Uaz.J  -  fal,  -  wil,  -  V. ^um-p^r- 

"a'  loT.:. tu,  -  it-«emz.  -  veri.  -  litV.  -  mu,  - 

meni.     Suq-wud,  -  iz,  -  az. qr,  -  -  ma,  Kan, 

kud. hav. woz. wil. 

Z      Iz-it. not.    Az-it. wu.l, woz,  — — 

rJ^^--  1  haz.     Az-gud. az.  -  grat,  -  -  az  -  fv, 

_  _  az  —  wel.  -  meni.  —  scn-az.     Iz-not;  haz-not. 

E.     Sid-be,  —  hav.  -  da.  —  find,  -■-  not 

L      Wil.  —  not,  —  be.  —  hav.  —  linU. 

R.     ar-yo,.  -  Buratiniz.  -  sori,  -  not;  -  yo  v  ven,  - 

"m!*"  Ma-bc  -  hav.  -  dn.  -.  az-wel.  -  konsider.    Mit-hav, 
_  dis.  -  sem.    Must-be,  -  tri  -  do.  -  kum,  -  go,  -  ae, 


^l- 


Il|»l 'Illl     >■>" 


126 


MANUAL   or   PllONOUllAVlIY. 


_  not      Mo»t-hapi,  (mos-hapi.)    -  Uklw    "  important. 
Meni-timz,  -  tiflz,  -  jnor,  -  ov-rtem. 

N.     In-el,  —  konsekwons,  —  fakt,  -  «h«,  —  ""fl^  ait  -- 


ti|)z,  -  hiz.     Eui-wun,  -  tin.  -  bodi.     No-pvt, 


Not,  —  be,  —  kwit,  —  dat,  —  u 
not.    Wer-w^r,  —  iz-dis,  —  qr. 


onli, 


ms. 


d5t, 

Nw-si 
non;  ned- 


Wkitinq  Exercise  XXXV. 

(In  phroicgraiiliy,  anJ  containing  all  the  word-sign"-) 
ON  IMPRCDVMENT. 

Th«  following.  In  the  oonitmoHon  of  wnteneee,  for  »»»•  •"»P'«y^^«* 
»11  thVwonT  «iOT«.  WM  furnished  f  jr  tho  early  edition  of  Phonography 
S  h  V^y.  jX'h:^.  an  English  oU.  ,  a..n.  1' ■»'«-}{2  ""i^  ^^l"* 
re-written,  until  every  word  can  be  pi v  upon  paper  ''"^»"^"'"'"°;; 
The  words  connected  by  hyphens  ihoali  !  e  written  h  phrase^  witnou* 
lifting  the  pen. 

Establifmenta  for-imprfflvmeni  and  fer  noloj  in-jeneml,  V 
impertent  tinz  in  a  kiodom;  and  demor  bo  hwnriUz  yH3Ua» 
^rXtm  tu  aknolej  P  prinsiplz.  Q  Ponograt.k  oBtabl.f- 
montin  partikyulur  iz  an  fmediat  advantaj  tu  even  jentlman 
er  cild.  h^  iz  a  member  ov-it,  and  tu  ol.  Akerdip  tu  jeneral 
opSyon  Fonog  iz  a  subjekt  we  kud  and  Jud  hav  plegv 
fn'^  w^d«t  it,  laggwaj  iz-not  kwit  hwot-it-Jud-be^  remqrk  in- 

fon     A2en,lve-1  'vun  ho)  haz  tetshwicj-qr-der  tu-hnn,  er  im- 
Kant  L-rte  w<Kid,  iz  keld  upon  tu  k^rfer-dem  and  imprmv 
E  tu4e  tu\,  hwon  be  haz  oportuniti.     H^.  er  on  hwot  prm- 
sipl  kan  we  be  gud  widst  imprmvment.    Remember  dat  even- 
t  n  iz  an  objekt  ov  impertans  d.t  kumz  under  it;  and,  beyond 
oi^dat-de  fur  wurd  ov-Se  Lord  God  woz  givn  fer-imprfflvment 
Siid  dar-be  difikultiz  in-de-wa  ov-yffir  imprmvment  and  ov-fle 
Bubiekjon  ov-ymr  natyur  tu  Godz  tra,»,  den  ,  k«l  "P°»  7«. 
hwil  ycD-kan  imprfflv,  lu-dm-so.    Qfter  hwot  i-hav  tola-ya  <iq,r- 
dj/yerobjokjonz  tu'it     W^r  d^.  an  ak^nt  ov-dem  wud  elred 
hav-bin  givn.    Grat  and  gud  ti^z  kan-not  kum  tugeder  widHt 
impra>vment.    But  Jud  i  be  told^at  it  mit  hav-bm  so.  from 
hTlTi  no  ov-de  jeniral  spirit  ov  ol,  i  tol-ya>  de  tra,t  u  az  i-hav 
Ki^n  it,  ner  kan  ye  objekt  tu-it.     In  fert.  jentlmen,  yo.  et  tu  es- 
tebUf  it  az  y«»r^f?r8t'prin«ip'.  dat-ycD-wil-not-giv  up;  but  az  yo. 
hav  oporUiniti,  hwi  not  doj-ol  dat  kan-bs-dun  toardz  impnDV- 
mentTeveri-tiDin-dis-wurld;  and  fud  it-be-dun  wel.  ya>-wil 
giv  ple3Hr  not  tu  me  alon,  but  tu  ol. 


f 


w^mm 


it i ^ 


■  liUtm  i«>»i#i  »i.  J"* 


—  important. 

—  Buq,  —  meni- 
pcirt,  —  diit,  — 
1  full.)  NH-s?r. 
;iw,  — non;  ned- 


7. 

)rd-«»gn».) 

'  th«  •mployment  cl 
on  of  Phonogrmphy 
lonld  be  written  Mid 
without  bflsitntion. 
H  phraui,  withoak 

lej  in-jeneralt  <v 
iw%r  it-iz  yuSUal 
lografik  eBtabliJ- 
;u  everi  jentlman 
kerdin  tu  jeneral 
d  Jud  hav  plejur 
be— a  remqrk  in- 
•kan-be  no  ohjek- 
er  tu-him,  er  im- 
-dem  and  impratv 
,  er  on  hwot  prin- 
nembor  dat  everi- 
jr  it;  and,  beyond 
I  for-imprflttvment. 
)vment,  and  ov-de 
1  I  kel  upon  ym, 
i-hav  told-ym  w- 
iv-dom  wud  elredi 
um  tugeder  widst 
hav-bin  so,  from 
le  trtDt  iz  az  i-hav 
Imen,  yo)  et  tu  es- 
.giv  up;  bnt  az  y<D 
ti  toardz  impraov- 
B-dun  wel,  ya>-wil 


>« 


AN   EXTENDED  ALPHABET. 


tfdtnbcU  ^llrtabet. 


LoNQ  Vowels. 

f    earth,  E.;  le,  F. 
^,*fair,£:.;fr{!re  F. 
a    pato,  F. 
o    Konig,  0. 
eu  deux,  F. 
1 1    u    mo,  F, 


Short  Vowklb. 


Nasal  Vowels. 

13  ^i^  in    fin,  F. 

I 
14;'L^en    en,  danse,/'. 

15  v^  un    brun,/*. 

16  ^  on    bon,  F. 


7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 


17 

18 
19 
20 


1 


I    ici,  F. 
6    fct6,  f. 

a,  a  aaV,  R;  TpAtte,F. 
o    Biicke,  0. 
0    bonne,  F. 
U    KUn8te,  0. 


Consonants. 

ch  ich,(?.;loch,/Sf. 
_^  gh  einig,  O. 
l^     11   Llanelly,  W. 
"^  /^  r    amor,  7, 


In  the  introduction  to  this  work  (See  pp.  15,  16,  17,) 
it  was  shown  that  an  accurate  analysis  of  the  English 
language  ^nve  forty-three  elementary  sounds,  including 
the  diphthongs  necessary  to  be  regarded  as  simple 
sounds;  and  in  the  writing  exercises  of  the  phonotypic 
edition  this  number  of  sounds  arc  represented,  although, 
on  account  of  the  greater  simplicity  of  a  six-vowel  scale, 
three  vowels,  (?.  q.  a,)  have  not  been  recognized  in  the 
phonographic  exercises. 


,<iitgmxis!^^g^smi^mass^miiii''Siisiiiix^'''' 


MiM^^<k*<MM*»;f> 


MANUAL  OF   PUONOUnAPIlV. 


t 


128  ^ 

For  the  benefit  of  such  «  .nay  wi«h  to  bo  a.  preciHe 
in  the  representation  of  correct  pronunciation  m  the  r 
IritinRUS  it  is  advisable  to  be  in  pr.nt.ng,  throe  add.- 
Uo  Higns  for  the  En.l.-h  language  are  provided  on 
;;::  reo'edin^  pa«e.  Suitable  si«us  ^r..^y^^^^J^^ 
the  additional  sounds  used  in  the  V  rench  and  German 
&c,  which  will  enable  those  who  understand  these 
fanguages  to  employ  Phonography    n  wnt.»g  thj^ 

Nos  1   2,  and  9,  will  bo  rocot;nizcd  as  i.ngl  sh  by  the 
JZU  air,  Jsk.     No.  6  is  so  near  the  close  Kng 
li.h  diphthong  u  in  d«po,  that  it  -7.  »^«  "f^f^;';* 
Bound  leaving  the  sign  .  fortho  combination  J/H  oryfl>. 
No  11  iB  vcr'y  near  the  New  England  0  in  stone  whole. 
&c     and  may  be  used  by  them  for  its  representation. 
*iho  French  nasal  sounds,  represented  by  -, -- -- 
an  wi  m,  and  heard  in  v!n,  No.  13;  tani>»,  No.  14,  m 
No.     5r;-',  No.  16,  are  pure  vo..U,  but  F---^ 
2o.,.jlL  no.,  as  well  a«  through  the  mouth.     Temp, 
for    nstaneo,  contains  but  two  sounds,  namely    t  and 
Ihe  Uttnasal  vowel   (..  d,  r.  •.  '■  when   terminating 
tne   itm   uuDu.  V  ,:i„r'^      Enfant  contains 

French  words,  are  generally  siler  .).     ^»/«» 
but  three  sounds;  namely,  the  consonant  /,  preceded 

*"TrsTol'guU:.Un  I0.K  nm,  etc..  and  ^uent, 

aJ>  Germal  Welsh,  ««^ ^^^^  ^-^r'TheTai 
\J.A  hv  — k  with  a  wave  line  through  it.     The  vocal 

"'^rmlA  lA,  .Mch  i.  .h.  wkUpered  f.™  of  A. 
ine  neiBii       ,  u-r /^  with  a  wave  line  struck     I 

emitting  breath  instead  of  voice.  __  | 


PIIOPOSKU 


r    AND     V    HOOK. 


)e  as  proeiHc 
tion  in  their 
g,  throe  uddi- 

provided  on 
iso  given  for 
and  Uorman, 
)r»tand   these 
iting  tli^m. 
ngliHh  by  the 
le  close  Kng- 
UBeJ  for  that 
ion  pi  QtyOi. 
\  Btone,  whole, 
cscntation. 

by  t»,  «^)  f», 
»,  No.  14;  M», 
)ut  pronounced 
louth.     Tempt, 

namely,  t  and 
m  terminating 
Infant  contains 
nt  /,  preceded 

,  and  frequent, 

lagcs,  is  repre- 

y  it.     The  vocal 

the  same  sign 

red  form  of  the 

rave  line  struck 

by  placing  the 

>  English  I,  but 


|)TOpOSttl 


F 


n^  V 


f„«  ,-nrdH  which  occur  quite  frequently 
resent/ and  «;   thus— 

V-       L      U-       -^     -^ 

Instead  of — 


c 


.  „nt  if  such  it  may  be  called,  has  never 

This  iroprovemcn  ,  If  s^^n  u      y  gy«tem,  partly 

,ecn  permanently  ^^^ZT^S io..^^^^-^ '^ ''^^ 
because  phonogrnphers  are  0PP«  «^  „„  recount 

ineonvcnience  of  further  «^  "^^^'j;;  ^f  ,te  ./w.-hook. 
of  the  fact,  that  i\<J-»'7^t 'jXltago  to  the  rapid 
But  as  the  abbreviation  .s  «f  «  7J7;"J„«ed  more  or 

-^^"'  'T,^.  f  L  C  %ive  r  explanation,  in  order 
;S:hV:l;ortlo  .louse  it  may  be  readable  to 

represents  »fcn. 


1 1 


.-  ■# 


"t=- 


IJ 


#« 


130 


MANUAL   OF   I'HONOGRAI'IIY. 


President — Benn  Pitman,  Cincinnati,  0. 
Secretary — Elias  Lonoley,  " 

Treasurer — II.  P.  Phossek,  " 

The  object  of  the  Assooiiition  is  the  union  »nd  cooperation  of  the 
friends  of  Phonetic  writing  and  printing  in  the  United  States  and  the 
Canada?.     The  members  lire  divided  into  the  following  classes;— 

Class  1.  Phonographers  who  teach  the  arts  professionally  or  privately, 
who  can  not,  on  account  of  other  duties,  attend  to  the  gratuitous  correc- 
tion of  exercises  of  learners  through  the  jwst,  but  who  are  willing  to  an- 
swer letters  of  inquiry,  or  letters  of  Phonographers  soliciting  advice  or 
information  on  matters  connected  with  Phonography  or  Phonetics. 

Class  2.  Phonographers  who  generously  volunteer  to  correct  the  eier- 
oiscs  of  icamors,  through  the  post. 

Class  3.  Phonographers  who  do  their  utmost  to  spread  a  knowledge  ui 
the  Phonetic  arts  in  private,  but  who  are  prevented  by  other  duties  from 
answering  letters,  or  attending  to  the  correction  of  exercises. 

Class  4.    Phoneticians  who  do  not  write  Phonography. 

Class  5.    Honorary  members. 

Phonographers  of  either  class  who  write  at  the  rate  of  100  or  more 
words  per  minute,  are  indicated,  in  the  list  of  members,  by  the  letter  K, 
(Reporter.) 

Phonographers  who  wish  to  cultivate  a  correspondence  with  members 
of  kindred  sentiments,  are  indicated  by  the  letter  C,  (Correspondent.) 

Conductors  of  and  contributors  to  Ever-Circulating  Magazines,  are  in- 
dicated by  the  lettersE  C,  (Evcr-Circulutor.) 

Honorary  members  are  indicated  by  the  *. 

Phonographers  under  sixteen  years  of  age  are  indicated  by  the  letter 
J,  (Junior.) 

A  President,  Council  and  other  Officers  are  elected  annually  by  the 
members  of  the  Association. 

The  Council  consists  of  fifty  (inclusive  of  the  Officers,)  of  those  who 
are  regarded  as  the  most  intelligent,  earnest,  and  reliable  American  Pho- 
nographers and  Phoneticians,  to  whom  are  submitted  all  matters  of 
theory  and  practice  on  which  an  intelligent  opinion  may  bo  desired,  but 
on  which  the  opinions  of  Phonographers  mijiht  be  dividi'd. 

Persons  of  learning  and  distinction  who  favor  the  Phonetic  principle 
may  become  ilonorary  members  by  the  coocurronco  of  any  six  mombci's 
of  the  Council. 

Phonographers  in  the  United  States  and  the  Canadns,  and  writers  of 
Phonetic  longhand,  are  eligible  to  membership  on  making  a  written  ap- 
plication. Subscription  of  funds,  voluntary,  tlembership  renewed 
annually.  .      c 

Persons  wishing  to  become  members  should  address  the  Secretary, 
stating  occupation  or  profession,  and  naming  the  Class  in  which  they 
wish  to  be  enrolled. 

^"The  Constitution  and  Annual  List  of  Members,  in  pamphlet  form, 
may  be  obtained  by  addressing  the  Secretary  and  enclosing  lOcts. 


iaiwU     I  I   '  HlinWii' 


jir.-^'-'' 


iBitj»:iir't^  Trri»iit.i  i:rT|i;g)i(ifiwii  a  nyviiv 


^bAA^kA*^ 


i,0. 


iperation  of  the 
states  and  the 

18969; — 

illy  or  privately, 
iituituaa  correo- 
'e  willing  to  an- 
jiting  advice  or 
'honctica. 
orrect  the  exer- 

a  knowledge  ui 
her  duties  from 


of  100  or  more 
by  the  letter  li, 

9  with  members 
•respondent. ) 
Lgazincs,  are  in- 

id  by  the  letter 

mnnally  by  the 

3,)  of  those  who 
American  Pho- 
all  matters  of 
bo  dcdirud,  but 

lonetle  principle 
iiy  six  moinbci'S 

I,  and  writers  of 
ng  a  written  ap- 
ership    renewed 

the  Secretary, 
3  in  which  they 

I  pamphlet  form, 
ng  lOets. 


J 


V  4 


[I   4 


Ui      I 


lit*' 


ift| 


fc*** 


132 


MANUAL  or  PHONOaBAPHT. 


^■^..°  .■)X  -  /\ -^ . .y\  r 


VWVI'WWV^VI^^^'^FI 


,4igKiWi1i^|Hj»''ii'lf''''ft*!'''W'''" 





Mill ' 


DBCLABATION  0»  INDEPBNDINCB. 


133 


s 

N 


j**ay l! jiMj^  'iW^||^">  '  iil'«*"«#''  J-gW 


III -'-*^ 


jyirtifliiliiiaitMii*'  WiC) "  r<««mmM<' »>  "Km^w'^i 


DECLARATION   OP   INDEPENDKNCE. 


-^a  /  ( .  1  "  ^.  t  -^ » 

/f>x  ^  ••^-  Lb  "^  )    <    ^.  '^  : 

^S^  V  b.  ^  ■>  '^  ^  ^  ■^  -^  % 


m 


-    i^ii|iftj(i^.Miii  I  ' 


III---- ^^^^^^A^***j 


bj * 


t^^^t^^fc^^O^^O*^ 


DKCLARATION    OP    INDKPKNUKNCK. 


i:i7 


M. 


^^TTrrr  i  ■ 


lilMliMiXiiiiiimn^'H'* 


r 


M****i****' 


^^^k^MM 


Mil'  t^ai^ 


138 


MANUAL   OV   PUONOdllAPUV. 


.^  "N)  J  "L   /P"^'^  9 )  I 


1 


c^^-=T 


.    ^X    >^ 


-*» 


^ 


t 


mm/mmmtm 


/ 


/ 


/ 


/ 


.  ^ 


II  -   -   -.>  IJM_I___  


u9^.nczszlLXO.A■xa' 


{;, 


Iiono6# 

M  Ml  1  Y^  '    ' 

VoNGlEY  BROTHERS,  PuUbKm 

No.  168  Vine  Street,  Cmcinnati,  0. 

.mok.'  for  the  r^^-'v^ir,''   ''':,„',!^,'„t   in   p^oaon.ing   thi.    work  to  the 
KT:ran^;::•lvl^rnrit  ^iZ/ rro^  any  other  w^ 

J;    -  -K'^SS^Sk'  ^M'i-  Where  the 

4.  The  Kxvroii.08  to  ho  '""«"  "™  \l'^^„„,  i„  .imilyKe  ueourat«ly,  and 
S.!t^  Sr-::^-- -ntiais  to  rapid  pr.,«re«  and  tho 
nttiiininont  of  a  g?'^,"'^^'?-  .„,  -  ,»viow  in  the  form  of  questions,  which, 
„  tn  ^rti^e-xrhtS  o:;::rn;:^-^^  S-t  .ervice  to  both  iearner 
""«'  Tco'-tain,  more  cxtcn.ive  li.U  of  Contracted  Words,  and  more 
rhras.ogrnphy  than  any  oi""  J'^f^o  features,  tho  AMBBiOAy  Manual 
7.   He,ide  '^o  ^bnve  cha  a«t  -^^^^^^^^  ihe  adapta- 

rr:?  rJ  a' •  to".ho"Suins  «;  ^-'«  Vr^SWr  Vhan  works  of  the  kind 
*"s.  Th-  A-BE.CAN  Manital  .sonofourth  lar^^^^^  ^.  ^^^  y,mos.v^ 
0i.unlly  are,  more  space  »'»'"K/JS'  „„  the  ,t^^^^^  i"  regard  to  the 
of  the  syHem.  for  t\,o  P"'P"'°  "\„'^  "Jj,"  U  is  printed  on  the  Tery  best 
necessily  of  tho  '»""»»  ".""»°cogantly  boonS. 
of  pnpcr,  and  is  substantially  ana  ^'"B       J  pwt«i«  «  "it. 

;BIOB3:-8.n«l.cop...,l-^.pe-o-"'r;j::i'°';f'    go... 

..  inoloth,  55'1!".       «       8  CM. 

in  buck  rh.ep,    "  "'"jo  „  one-third  let; 
Thte    «o  10  copies  .t  one  fourth  Um,   13  to  a« 
a"ir  more  at'^haU  price.  _ — 


-^ 


tr^' 


!     t 


I  :■■: 


T  U    K 


T!PE  OF  THE  TIMES, 

^  lonrnal  of  %  Miiting  an))  SstUing  ^rform. 

FOR    X  8  5  7  • 

Vol.    X. — 16  Large  Double-Column  Pages. — tl  »  Year. 

Longley  Brothers,  Bditort  ft  Fnbliihan, 

laat  via*  at.,  ClaalMUiU,  o. 

Tb«  Ttfi  or  trb  Timm  wilt  heraa(t«ir  appear  iemi-monthly,  and  will 
b«  davotad  •ntlrely  to  tha  caune  of  Phonotiu  Writing  and  I'rinting,  in- 
elading  all  iti  philowpbioal,  aduoational  and  moral  l)«irin«.  Wiln  Ibo 
axoeptTon  of  an  oooaiional  artiolo  in  expoiitian  of  ttio  principlon  nf  the 
phnnetle  lyttem,  it  will  b«  printed  exduiivoly  in  tlio  new  orthography, 
which,  10  far  from  being  an  obttaote  to  being  read,  will,  un  aooount  of 
iti  limplioity  and  admirable  ooniiitenoj,  make  it  more  interoaling  than 
the  orJinarr  tpalling,  The  paper  employed  will  be  of  the  bo«t  book 
quality,  and  the  winting  rery  neatly  executed,  lo  that  Spelling  Itofurmeri 
may  be  proud  of  the  appearance  of  their  cheriihed  ayitem. 

In  lUaatrsting  the  beauty  and  legibility  of  phonetic  typography,  we 
•hall  giva  in  every  number  either  an  Okiqinal  Stobt  of  unobjection- 
able moral  bearing,  a  Skbtoh  or  Chabaotkb,  or  a  BlootArHT ;  alen, 
SoilNTirio  article*  that  will  be  of  general  interest,  together  with  the 

Jiroper  MiaoiLLANr  and  Pobtkt  that  are  raquiiita  to  make  the  Ttpb  a 
avorite  with  all  clatnea. 

Phonetic  Ixnturora  and  Teacher*  will  receive  eapoolal  attention  in  our 
eolamna,  and  they  are  respectfully  aolicitod  to  favor  ua  with  brief  nutef, 
for  publication,  in  reference  to  the  pnraona  or  elaaaea  they  toacb,  lliu 
•uboola  where  phonetic  teaching  ia  employed,  Ac. 

All  friend*  of  the  Phonetic  cauae  are  aolioited  to  act  a*  Agenia  for  tho 
Ttpc,  in  making  Itrangera  acquainted  with  ita  character,  in  aolicitin);  fur 
it  their  patronage,  and  in  forwarding  aubacriptiona.  For  thpir  *prvici>.'< 
they  may  retain  35  percent  of  the  money;  or,  if  they  chooae  to  forcxe  thu 
percontngo,  they  may  form  cluba  of  four  or  more  at  75  ota.  each. 

Specimen  coniea  will  be  forwiir.lo<l,  gmtuitoualy,  to  any  addroaa,  AUn, 
parcela  of  thia  Proapectua,  for  distribution  by  loiter. 

THE     YOUTH'S     FRIEND, 

A  Monthly  Illust  ^  ated  Paper  for  Children. 

The  Fbiknd  contains  eight  larg*  throe-column  pagen,  is  printed  on 
the  beat  of  paper,  and  neatly  ornamented.  It*  contcnia  lu-e  di'aigned  to 
combine  intereet  with  inalruction,  and  inatraction  with  amusement ;  and 
while  thoy  are  of  an  eminently  moral  and  elevating  chitnu'ter,  they  are 
kept  free  from  all  aeotarian  biaa.  An  appropriate  piece  of  )lusio  is  given 
every  alternate  month ;  and  one  page  of  every  number  is  printed  in  pho- 
netic apelling,  which  render*  it  a  fflo*t  effectual  mean*  fur  promoting  the 
love  of  aconaiatent  orthography  among  the  young  peupio  who  ere  here- 
after to  aay  whether  the  Spelling  Reform  ahali  become  a  rcnlity.  Ijot 
Pbonoticiaii*  aid  in  giving  il  a  large  circulation,  by  aeiniin^  aulinribers 
at  50  ot*.;  threo  for  91,00;  ten  for  $3,00;  and  twenty  fur  $  j.illl.  Fur  every 
ten  eubaoriben  the  Agent  is  entitlod  to  an  oxira  copy.     \il<l>(<p*  a' above. 


^^^^Pm^^>l"MF««^P^^PV^^^rw«V«VWW«W^ 


MBtK 


1  IIA  JJ  M  I 

itg  ^tfonn. 

i. — tl  »  Year, 
liihen, 


monthly,  and  will 
and  I'riiiting,  iii- 
irin({«.  With  tlio 
prinuiploii  of  the 
new  orthography, 
rill,  un  BOoount  of 
B  interoiting  than 
<if  the  bout  booli 
Spelling  Roformori 
tem. 

io  typography,  we 
«T  of  unobjet'tion- 
BlooiArHT ;  alen, 
together  with  the 
nuke  the  Ttpk  a 

U  attention  in  our 

with  brief  note.', 

M  they  teach,  lliu 

•I  Agents  for  tho 
er.  In  solicitinji  fur 
For  their  uprvici-.* 
Iioow  to  forego  the 
5  ots.  ench. 
tny  adilreas.    Also, 


I  E  N  D, 

Children. 

age!<,  i>  printed  on 
U  lire  di'iigni'd  to 
h  aniiiwincnt ;  and 
chiiriu'ter,  they  are 
e  of  Muiio  in  gWen 
'  ia  printed  in  pbo- 
8  for  promoting  the 
)plo  nlio  are  bere- 
oino  n  renlily.  IiCt 
leiiilint;  sulMnriber* 
r  $j.i>n.  For  BTery 
\il<l>e!i«  a' above. 


ISljonetlf     3^ublicatiDns. 

PibUshei  •■*  8oM  by  LoBglcy  Brothers,  cmeliitU,  0. 

„, , ,-,,,  DE<pnDU_i„.tltuted  to  mako  uniTenal  •ducatloB  po***- 

THE  SPBI.^INO  REFORM-  Mtllateu^wm.     ^^^^^  ^^^  ,„,  to  acquUe. 

We,  by  rendering  »''«  "••J.""jf '"f, '",,oUing  wofdi  a.  they  are  pronounced, 
I>HO!iOTTPT  it  a  rational  'y?**™/''  '»I;i 'iZ  a  Mnaralo  letter  for  each  ioand, 
by  employing  an  enlarged  •'P»'»»1''''«?^J"'°«'uU  entirely  diipenied  with, 
Uy  whleh  mean,  the  drudgery  ?.' ''•7'"«  \urth  of  the  time  re<,ulr«l  in  tha 
and  learnl^  t«  rea.1  i.  ""^"'"P"'"?-'';  T  i.Zphlcal  method  oT  writing  th. 
old  way.  n-HONOOBAfUT  u  '  y"'' Xil''!2P.he  .impleat  geometrioal  lign^ 
Engll.fi  Unguago,  by  an  •>P^»»^  ~?«Xi»ken  w"rd.  It  may  ba  written 
whTeh  aocurately  repre«>nt  h"  •°»°''»  "J  J^Mually  legible,  and  .uch  ia  th. 
:IS.X^/X^r5li:i';2  l*X'-y  l^^^-HyUer^l  even  without ... 
•id  of  a  teacher.  

rhonotypic    Works. 

Chart  of  the  Phonotypic  Alphabet,  on  a  sheet  28  ^^^ 

Th'/»l06''b;'5i.%^"r.' explanatory  matter,  ana  remark,  on  th.  ^^ 
aoquiaition  of  Good  Ktading,  i  JQ 

?horii:  MmeTe-i  letter  Hlu-trated  ,vi.l,  .  ^. 
Frt'prnS'Re'X,  containing  .impl.  and  in-^^^^ 
sSnd  I-honSiTReader,  containing  Icsons  ^^_^ 
Tt*  T-ni^^R^-ader^nr  a^on„e  o^^^ 

Romanic  Reading  I^Mona.     tor  the  um  oi  rnoncii.  ^_^^ 

BSS;,hi»  of  thtfe'Uent.,  with  their  Portrait,. 
N'.TfcenTU^re'^diS^cording  to  th. 


-1,40 


pK 


'•f>"mf,m'>"^"W  ^ 


LONOLBT   BROTIimi   LIST  07   PCBLIOATIONt. 


I(  > 


Br 


rs  '■( 


:i' 


W  ■  ' 


Phonetic   Longhand  Writer;    exhibiting    varioua 
Longhand  Alphabet,  in  Blips,  to  be  lued  aa  a  key 

by  cnclwilng  In  lutlcru  written  In  vbnnotlo  longhand.    I'er  doien, 

School  Credit  Tickets.— A   handsome  and  uaeful 

form  of  Credit  TlckeU,  in  I'bonetio  drew.  Tho  Ticket  ii  »dftpt«d  for 
I'rlmnry  nwl  l)liiiri.'t  Hchooln.    l'«r  hundred,  _,  .   .  , 

Type  of  the  Times;  a  journal  of  the  Wrttmg  and 

l^palling  Beform.    Printed  In  th«  new  ortliogr»phy.   Soml-mouthly 
I'er  ye«r,  In  tdTanM, 

The  Youth's  Friend;  an  elegant  monthly  paper, 

derotMl  to  the  Improvement  of  the  ToiinR.  KmboUlihed  with  Por- 
traiU  and  Historloal  Illuntratlon.,  onrtly  In  the  phonetic  orthography. 
M  oenU  »  yoM ;  three  oopioi,  $l,o51  ton  coplei,  13,00  (  twenty  ooplci,   fS.OO 


•-T 


4« 


•1,00 


80-e* 


Fhonoiirraphic    Works* 

First  Lesson  in  Phonography  ;  Containing  the  Al 

pbnbet  and  a  "implo  rcudlnp  lewon.    I'joful  for  lecturer,  to  dUlrlbuti 
In  nn  ouilicnce,  Ac.  I  cl.     I'er  hundred,  ... 

American  Manual  of  Phonogiaphy  ;  being  a  com- 
plete ciWiition  of  riu.notic  Shorlhaml.  o»pfcinllv  arrnngcd  .o  n«  to 
live  the  fullest  in.tructlon  to  tho«o  wlio  hoTc  not  llie  fti«i»u»nce  of  'he 
'ral  tcnchor.    In  paper,  40  -42 1  cloth,  »•»—•» 

rw-  This  inttructi'in  book  u  jutt  /mhluhfd,  and  difrr,  frtm  any  i.thfr 
^wi  of  tht  kind  in  thi*  important  mi  ticular;  It  th'r„u,^hly ylatn» 
t\$  ri.mi.tmc  <rr  new  printimj  alphuM,  and  tti  cxmifM  /'*  *iilt- 

toTMctly  and  rapidly  than  ifttiuttd  in  tht  ordinary  otiKography. 
BENfl   pitman's  PIIONOUIIAPIIIC   PUBLICATIONS. 

Manual  of  Phonography,  50—57,  extra  cloth,    60—67 
Phouoffraphic  Reader,  eugraved  exerciseB,  /& 

Cruise  of  tho  Tomtit;  Second  Reader,  ditto,  26 

Manners  Book,  corresponding  style,  do.  75— »l 

Teacher,  a  Treatise  on  Lecturing  and  leaching 

Phonograi  by,  ^ .  .  1'*^™'?J 

Copy  Slips,  a  series  of  Phonographic  exercises,  «»'— JJ 
Phonographcr's  Song,  richly  illustrated,  „  *™J 

Phon.  Slag.,  for  1854,  '55,  '50,  per  vol,  1'26-1,86 

Phonographic  Chart,  in  colors,  75— i,w 

Reporter's  Companion;  the  adaptation  of  Phon. 

to  verbatim  reporting,  75—81,  cloth,         ^»""~-^'"J 
History  of  Shorthand,  reporting  style,  ll~l\ 

Manners  Book,  in  easy  reporting,  or     iSn 

Phon.  Reporter  for  1854,  ^55,  '66,  per  vol,    1,25—1,36 


1^ 


iMWUfWi  i» " 


TlOIft. 


iflr    various 

"  10-11 

1  aa  a  key 

I'er  doien,  • — f 

and  uaeibl 

li  adapted  fur 

tting  and 

kml-montbl/. 

•1,00 

hly  paper, 

ihed  with  For- 
10  orthofraphy. 
tmtnij  oopioi,   f4,0Q 


.8* 

ng  the  Al- 

ur*  to  diitrlbute 

SO-40 

;ing  a  com- 

rrnnKcd  >o  n*  to 
niuislanca  of  tb* 

&0— M 

B  from  any  ithtr 
riruqhly  tplaint 
■erfitts  far  U'Ht- 
to  /yniyrftl  mor* 
•y  ortlmgraphy. 

ILICATI0N8. 

V  cloth,    60—67 
ises,  25 

ditto,  26 

0.  75—81 
d  Teaching 

1,00—1,07 
xercisea,  10 — 11 
d,  25—27 

1,25—1,86 
75—1,00 
1  of  Phon. 

1,  1,00—1,07 

76-81 

76—81 

vol,    1,25—1,36 


1 


%-A 


80 


ReV'Srt'or.SVhlMjE  High  School  p. 

the  l'""*^"'.!'"  ''."''*  .,.,„.,,  ,  ...i..,  ,,„„/,,U.mtU.n,  in  oi.P<.« 


lOSOtET  BUOTHEM  LWT  oy  yOBMOATTOlW. 

~rhonetirWorks  !■  the  Coniioii  8peHii|. 

on  Phono- 

rhonoKriiphy  In 
.Uadcl,,hhrniKl.  Sch..,l,  an  ^J^^V^  irot-ufon'theX. 

?iiruT^:i;:Jt?:";tl:".:^ -;;^^^  -»^^  '--r  or  tb, 

i[y.Umeverpubli»bca.     (0  octavo  ,«ige.,  covered, 

rtaonetic  Stationery. 

Phonetic  Copy-Book«,  f«f,  Common  Sc^^^^^^^  ' 

;s;sr  tdr':M;M"?Sr^^-"  •'-  ^-»  "^-^ 

i'        in     12.  Iiv  the  doion,  onc-fuurlh  lew.  tiu_ 

R'eJortingV/per   aouble-ruM  ^^^^^^^ 

Ph^SarLetter  Paper,  (the  eize  of  an  envel- 
~|..     >u^..e.^.^^  and 

a,,>V«-nt  ""ibility.    l'He«;^'^""' ^^^^^^^^^  „  pin  wo  moan, 

$1.75;  oxtm  8i«e,  $2,00,  WBiranica.     yiy  rf  ^^     ^y  „. 

,i.u.  if  th«  I«i"' «»'"««  "ffJ^f,[r"SC  manufacturer  never 
,«  ,mng  tUo  pen  a  ""''^Anr   vKnc  Um.aratu«,  75  cU;  eliding  or 
■..,.,i„,.  l>«nV  „,^rtS,  $n5     toy  m  Jfroo  of  postage, 
extcnsum  bolder,  ditto,  »i.^J.     o"'"  "J'  Cl.o/in   30 35. 

Reporting  Covers,  Morocco,  75— 80,  ^"^ep,  JO-^o. 
PhSnographic  Breast  Pin;  a  neat  god  emblem, 

"aLTof' iil'rXrg-ES- KVotber,  a.  tbey  pa.  up  and 

Phonetrifnvelopes,  medium  size;    conlaining  a 

'^S^Sof  tbe  3  of  Wo^ograpby  aud  I'bonotypy,  w.tb  a  .pec.- 
wen  of  the  Utter.    Per  hundred,  -^ 


•1,00 


I 


mmm 


.^vy^^sf^- 


lOSOMT  BEOTBra^JJST^PJ^raUOA^ 


Prononncing  VooabaW  of   Geogmphj^^J^^ 

sUlstioal F«t8  M.re  u.uann  Ga«^^^^^^  ^^^  ^^       Time^ 

prise  those  of  the  °o» V  'iVch  arrUke  y  to  be  met  with  ia  general 
Sown  to  the  P«»«°t  ^*y' rJl  „.,!Arr 8uoh  Biographical  Facts  as  an. 

necessary  in  a  Booli  of  ««'«'* ",",„•  _i.i,  Tftbles  which  show  at  a  glance 
Kiror^HU^tnW;ffiuS.s!^'  By  E,ias  Long.ey.^10  pp.^^_^ 
relations  to  the  Soil.    By  L^A  Hme,  22*  PPj.      ^.         ^f  Mau's 

Science  and  Man;  beit^g  a  Viuaic  ,_^ 

Educational  reUtions.    Bf  ^- J' Xove'S  Xabor  BOt  Lost. 

Carrie  Cummmgs;    or,    liove  8  1.^  ^.^^        ^         5.,, 

A  singnlarly  jnterestmg  Bof^^'/^'y-    "[fining  rCCipeS  and 

The  Practical  Cook-Book,  contam.  „^^     j       ^^ 
pl^iCd  Teachers'  Guide >  the  Physjcji,  I^^ 

"^uUectual.  and  Moral  Educa:t.ono^^^^^^ 

Young  Folks'  A.raerican  ^  7""*^"  ^h  Piano  accompani- 

„ents,  «o"P''«'»s»^"/;iJe''"9e  oHntoxicating  Liquors, 

G.  Buckiy,       o-rr„„uii  IVisease  and  Curc :  Reasons 
Philosophy  of  Heal^^^^^^^^^^  ,,„,.^  Bath. 

l^Utn  Waa»-'-    »'  °'-  •'•  '^^  '*"'"'' 


— 1* 


—10 


—15 


-U 


in  Water-xreaimo"-    "j  -_ 

ChUdreB's    IlUstrated    T«y-»««J^*- 

*'■",„     ^     muft  Ronff  of  a  happy  hoy, 
The   Hobby-Horse.    The  song  oia^jF^^ 

l^ut  hi.  Hobby-Horse-  each  verse  .Uusuaedw.in^ 

In  plain  print,  5c,  per  do.  40.      " '"'^°  ^  jji^u^.      The  ad- 

Harry  6'Hum  and  his  big  roumi  j^        ^^^  ^^.^  ^ 

--\nittriKte*a:oVe'''lS°>"^  P''"'-  ^^^  ^'  *»••  ''^•' 

•^"various  colors,  lOo..  per  do..  75e.  Discontented 

The  Little  Big  Man.   The  story  oi  a 


^^a^.^^^^g^^ji^^sa^-''*-^^  '''-""  ■>-«*"Mif^"'"^""*''"r 


1»»»    "  111.  iiJ!l»"P^ij 


IONS. 


»ns. 

;al  and 

oBos  worthy 
■iptire  mna 
fames  oon^ 
leru  Tim«^ 
ia  generttl 
'acta  M  are 
mplet*  Liiat 
at  a  glanoa 
lOf^sUtures, 
lollezes  and 

»f  Man's 

50— M 

»f  Man's 

60-M 

lot  Lost. 

96  pp.,         25- 8» 

jipes  and 

noiples.    By 

•    ''^  J^P"'- 40-47 

^sical,  In- 

3  Morley. 

jollection 

10  accompani- 
8  day. 

;  Liquors, 

d.    By  Dr.  J. 


— 1* 


—10 


—15 


-U 


:  Reasons 

kinds  d  Baths 

•  Books* 

appy  boy, 

lutif  al  picture. 
)or  doi.  &0c. 

.    The  ad- 

i  for  his  amns*- 
;  per  doi.  50o.; 

Iscontented 

atter  worse,  and 
plain  print,  lOo., 

makes  tha 

a  with  a  itraphie 

V  25—30 


) 


r. 


^ 


?! 


^i 


^hfcfcrt 


